The Caml Light system


                                 release 0.73



                       Documentation and user's manual



                                 Xavier Leroy



                               December 2, 1997



















     Copyright oc 1997 Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et
                                 Automatique












Contents



I Getting started                                                            6

1  Installation instructions                                                 7
   1.1  The Unix version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    7
   1.2  The Macintosh version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    7
   1.3  The MS-Windows version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    8

II The Caml Light language reference manual                                  9

2  The core Caml Light language                                             10
   2.1  Lexical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   11
   2.2  Global names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   13
   2.3  Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   14
   2.4  Type expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   15
   2.5  Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   16
   2.6  Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   17
   2.7  Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   19
   2.8  Global definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   26
   2.9  Directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   28
   2.10 Module implementations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   28
   2.11 Module interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   29

3  Language extensions                                                      30
   3.1  Streams, parsers, and printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   30
   3.2  Guards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   31
   3.3  Range patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   31
   3.4  Recursive definitions of values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   32
   3.5  Local definitions using where . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   32
   3.6  Mutable variant types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   32
   3.7  String access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   33
   3.8  Alternate syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   33
   3.9  Infix symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   33
   3.10 Directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   34

III The Caml Light commands                                                 36

4  Batch compilation (camlc)                                                37
   4.1  Overview of the compiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   37
   4.2  Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   38
   4.3  Modules and the file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   41
   4.4  Common errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   41

5  The toplevel system (camllight)                                          46
   5.1  Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   47
   5.2  Toplevel control functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   49
   5.3  The toplevel and the module system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   51
   5.4  Common errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   53


                                      1


                                                                             2


   5.5  Building custom toplevel systems:  camlmktop. . . . . . . . . . .   53
   5.6  Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   54

6  The runtime system (camlrun)                                             55
   6.1  Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   55
   6.2  Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   55
   6.3  Common errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   56

7  The librarian (camllibr)                                                 58
   7.1  Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   58
   7.2  Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   58
   7.3  Turning code into a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   59

8  Lexer and parser generators (camllex, camlyacc)                          61
   8.1  Overview of camllex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   61
   8.2  Syntax of lexer definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   62
   8.3  Overview of camlyacc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   63
   8.4  Syntax of grammar definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   64
   8.5  Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   66
   8.6  A complete example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   66

9  The debugger (camldebug)                                                 68
   9.1  Compiling for debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   68
   9.2  Invocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   68
   9.3  Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   69
   9.4  Executing a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   70
   9.5  Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   72
   9.6  The call stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   73
   9.7  Examining variable values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   74
   9.8  Controlling the debugger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   75
   9.9  Miscellaneous commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   77

10 Profiling (camlpro)                                                      78
   10.1 Compiling for profiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   78
   10.2 Profiling an execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   79
   10.3 Printing profiling information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   79
   10.4 Known bugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   79

11 Using Caml Light under Emacs                                             80
   11.1 Updating your .emacs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   80
   11.2 The caml editing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   80
   11.3 Running the toplevel as an inferior process . . . . . . . . . . .   81
   11.4 Running the debugger as an inferior process . . . . . . . . . . .   81

12 Interfacing C with Caml Light                                            83
   12.1 Overview and compilation information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   83
   12.2 The value type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   85
   12.3 Representation of Caml Light data types . . . . . . . . . . . . .   86
   12.4 Operations on values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   87
   12.5 Living in harmony with the garbage collector. . . . . . . . . . .   89
   12.6 A complete example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   91

IV The Caml Light library                                                   94

13 The core library                                                         95
   13.1 bool:  boolean operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   95
   13.2 builtin:  base types and constructors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   96
   13.3 char:  character operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   97


                                                                             3


   13.4 eq:  generic comparisons  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   97
   13.5 exc:  exceptions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   98
   13.6 fchar:  character operations, without sanity checks . . . . . . .   99
   13.7 float:  operations on floating-point numbers  . . . . . . . . . .   99
   13.8 fstring:  string operations, without sanity checks  . . . . . . .  101
   13.9 fvect:  operations on vectors, without sanity checks  . . . . . .  101
   13.10int:  operations on integers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  101
   13.11io:  buffered input and output  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  104
   13.12list:  operations on lists  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  109
   13.13pair:  operations on pairs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  111
   13.14ref:  operations on references  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  112
   13.15stream:  operations on streams  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  112
   13.16string:  string operations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  113
   13.17vect:  operations on vectors  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  115

14 The standard library                                                    118
   14.1 arg:  parsing of command line arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . .  118
   14.2 baltree:  basic balanced binary trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  119
   14.3 filename:  operations on file names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  120
   14.4 format:  pretty printing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  121
   14.5 gc:  memory management control and statistics . . . . . . . . . .  128
   14.6 genlex:  a generic lexical analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  129
   14.7 hashtbl:  hash tables and hash functions  . . . . . . . . . . . .  130
   14.8 lexing:  the run-time library for lexers generated by camllex . .  132
   14.9 map:  association tables over ordered types . . . . . . . . . . .  133
   14.10parsing:  the run-time library for parsers generated by camlyacc   134
   14.11printexc:  a catch-all exception handler  . . . . . . . . . . . .  134
   14.12printf:  formatting printing functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  134
   14.13queue:  queues  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  136
   14.14random:  pseudo-random number generator . . . . . . . . . . . . .  137
   14.15set:  sets over ordered types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  137
   14.16sort:  sorting and merging lists  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  138
   14.17stack:  stacks  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  139
   14.18sys:  system interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  139

15 The graphics library                                                    142
   15.1 graphics:  machine-independent graphics primitives  . . . . . . .  143

16 The unix library:  Unix system calls                                    149
   16.1 unix:  interface to the Unix system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  149

17 The num library:  arbitrary-precision rational arithmetic               168
   17.1 num:  operations on numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  168
   17.2 arith_status:  flags that control rational arithmetic . . . . . .  171

18 The str library:  regular expressions and string processing             172
   18.1 str:  regular expressions and high-level string processing  . . .  172

V Appendix                                                                 176

19 Further reading                                                         177
   19.1 Programming in ML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  177
   19.2 Descriptions of ML dialects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  178
   19.3 Implementing functional programming languages . . . . . . . . . .  179
   19.4 Applications of ML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  180












Foreword



This manual documents the release 0.73 of the Caml Light system.  It is
organized as follows.

 -  Part I, ``Getting started'', explains how to install Caml Light on your
    machine.

 -  Part II, ``The Caml Light language reference manual'', is the reference
    description of the Caml Light language.

 -  Part III, ``The Caml Light commands'', documents the Caml Light compiler,
    toplevel system, and programming utilities.

 -  Part IV, ``The Caml Light library'', describes the modules provided in
    the standard library.

 -  Part V, ``Appendix'', contains a short bibliography, an index of all
    identifiers defined in the standard library, and an index of Caml Light
    keywords.


Conventions

The Caml Light system comes in several versions:  for Unix machines, for
Macintoshes, and for PCs.  The parts of this manual that are specific to one
version are presented as shown below:

Unix: This is material specific to the Unix version.

Mac:  This is material specific to the Macintosh version.

PC:   This is material specific to the PC version.


License

                                   c
The Caml Light system is copyright o 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994,
1995, 1996, 1997 Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en
Automatique (INRIA). INRIA holds all ownership rights to the Caml Light
system.  See the file COPYRIGHT in the distribution for the copyright notice.
  The Caml Light system can be freely copied, but not sold.  More precisely,
INRIA grants any user of the Caml Light system the right to reproduce it,
provided that the copies are distributed free of charge and under the
conditions given in the COPYRIGHT file.  The present documentation is
distributed under the same conditions.






                                      4


                                                                             5


Availability by FTP

The complete Caml Light distribution resides on the machine ftp.inria.fr.  The
distribution files can be transferred by anonymous FTP:

           Host:       ftp.inria.fr (Internet address 192.93.2.54)
           Login name: anonymous
           Password:   your e-mail address
           Directory:  lang/caml-light
           Files:      see the index in file README
























                                    Part I



                               Getting started




































                                      6











Chapter 1



Installation instructions



This chapter explains how to install Caml Light on your machine.


1.1 The Unix version

Requirements. Any machine that runs under one of the various flavors of the
Unix operating system, and that has a flat, non-segmented, 32-bit or 64-bit
address space.  4M of RAM, 2M of free disk space.  The graphics library
requires X11 release 4 or later.

Installation. The Unix version is distributed in source format, as a
compressed tar file named cl73unix.tar.gz.  To extract, move to the directory
where you want the source files to reside, transfer cl7unix.tar.gz to that
directory, and execute

        zcat cl73unix.tar.gz | tar xBf -

This extracts the source files in the current directory.  The file INSTALL
contains complete instructions on how to configure, compile and install Caml
Light.  Read it and follow the instructions.

Troubleshooting. See the file INSTALL.


1.2 The Macintosh version

Requirements. Any Macintosh with at least 1M of RAM (2M is recommended),
running System 6 or 7.  About 850K of free space on the disk.  The parts of
the Caml Light system that support batch compilation currently require the
Macintosh Programmer's Workshop (MPW) version 3.2.  MPW is Apple's development
environment, and it is distributed by APDA, Apple's Programmers and Developers
Association.  See the file READ ME in the distribution for APDA's address.

Installation. Create the folder where the Caml Light files will reside.
Double-click on the file cl73macbin.sea from the distribution.  This displays
a file dialog box.  Open the folder where the Caml Light files will reside,
and click on the Extract button.  This will re-create all files from the
distribution in the Caml Light folder.
  To test the installation, double-click on the application Caml Light.  The
``Caml Light output'' window should display something like

        >       Caml Light version 0.73

        #


                                      7


Chapter 1.   Installation instructions                                       8


In the ``Caml Light input'' window, enter 1+2;; and press the Return key.  The
``Caml Light output'' window should display:

        >       Caml Light version 0.73

        #1+2;;
        - : int = 3
        #

Select ``Quit'' from the ``File'' menu to return to the Finder.

  If you have MPW, you can install the batch compilation tools as follows.
The tools and scripts from the tools folder must reside in a place where MPW
will find them as commands.  There are two ways to achieve this result:
either copy the files in the tools folder to the Tools or the Scripts folder
in your MPW folder; or keep the files in the tools folder and add the
following line to your UserStartup file (assuming Caml Light resides in folder
Caml Light on the disk named My HD):

        Set Commands "{Commands},My HD:Caml Light:tools:"

In either case, you now have to edit the camlc script, and replace the string

        Macintosh HD:Caml Light:lib:

(in the first line) with the actual pathname of the lib folder.  For example,
if you put Caml Light in folder Caml Light on the disk named My HD, the first
line of camlc should read:

        Set stdlib "My HD:Caml Light:lib:"

Troubleshooting. Here is one commonly encountered problem.

Cannot find file stream.zi
    (Displayed in the ``Caml Light output'' window, with an alert box telling
    you that Caml Light has terminated abnormally.)  This is an installation
    error.  The folder named lib in the distribution must always be in the
    same folder as the Caml Light application.  It's OK to move the
    application to another folder; but remember to move the lib directory to
    the same folder.  (To return to the Finder, first select ``Quit'' from
    the ``File'' menu.)


1.3 The MS-Windows version

Requirements. A PC equipped with a 80386, 80486 or Pentium processor, running
MS Windows 3.x, Windows 95 or Windows NT. About 3M of free space on the disk.
At least 8M of RAM is recommended.

Installation. The MS-Windows version is distributed as a self-extracting,
self-installing archive named cl73win.exe.  Simply run it and follow the steps
of the installation program.
























                                   Part II



                   The Caml Light language reference manual




































                                      9











Chapter 2



The core Caml Light language




Foreword

This document is intended as a reference manual for the Caml Light language.
It lists all language constructs, and gives their precise syntax and informal
semantics.  It is by no means a tutorial introduction to the language:  there
is not a single example.  A good working knowledge of the language, as
provided by the companion tutorial Functional programming using Caml Light, is
assumed.
  No attempt has been made at mathematical rigor:  words are employed with
their intuitive meaning, without further definition.  As a consequence, the
typing rules have been left out, by lack of the mathematical framework
required to express them, while they are definitely part of a full formal
definition of the language.  The reader interested in truly formal
descriptions of languages from the ML family is referred to The definition of
Standard ML and Commentary on Standard ML, by Milner, Tofte and Harper, MIT
Press.

Warning

Several implementations of the Caml Light language are available, and they
evolve at each release.  Consequently, this document carefully distinguishes
the language and its implementations.  Implementations can provide extra
language constructs; moreover, all points left unspecified in this reference
manual can be interpreted differently by the implementations.  The purpose of
this reference manual is to specify those features that all implementations
must provide.

Notations

The syntax of the language is given in BNF-like notation.  Terminal symbols
are set in typewriter font (like this).  Non-terminal symbols are set in
italic font (like that).  Square brackets [...] denote optional components.
Curly brackets {...} denotes zero, one or several repetitions of the enclosed
components.  Curly bracket with a trailing plus sign {...}+ denote one or
several repetitions of the enclosed components.  Parentheses (...) denote
grouping.








                                      10


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   11


2.1 Lexical conventions

Blanks

The following characters are considered as blanks:  space, newline, horizontal
tabulation, carriage return, line feed and form feed.  Blanks are ignored, but
they separate adjacent identifiers, literals and keywords that would otherwise
be confused as one single identifier, literal or keyword.

Comments

Comments are introduced by the two characters (*, with no intervening blanks,
and terminated by the characters *), with no intervening blanks.  Comments are
treated as blank characters.  Comments do not occur inside string or character
literals.  Nested comments are correctly handled.

Identifiers

                    ident  ::= letter {letter | 0...9 | _}
                   letter  ::= A...Z | a...z

  Identifiers are sequences of letters, digits and _ (the underscore
character), starting with a letter.  Letters contain at least the 52 lowercase
and uppercase letters from the ASCII set.  Implementations can recognize as
letters other characters from the extended ASCII set.  Identifiers cannot
contain two adjacent underscore characters (__).  Implementation may limit the
number of characters of an identifier, but this limit must be above 256
characters.  All characters in an identifier are meaningful.

Integer literals

         integer-literal  ::= [-] {0...9}+
                            | [-] (0x | 0X) {0...9 | A...F | a...f}+
                            | [-] (0o | 0O) {0...7}+
                            | [-] (0b | 0B) {0...1}+

  An integer literal is a sequence of one or more digits, optionally preceded
by a minus sign.  By default, integer literals are in decimal (radix 10).  The
following prefixes select a different radix:
                       --------------------------------
                       |Prefix|Radix                  |
                       --------------------------------
                       |0x, 0X|hexadecimal (radix 16) |
                       |0o, 0O|octal (radix 8)        |
                       |0b, 0B|binary (radix 2)       |
                       --------------------------------

(The initial 0 is the digit zero; the O for octal is the letter O.)

Floating-point literals

   float-literal  ::=  [-] {0...9}+ [. {0...9}] [(e | E) [+ | -] {0...9}+]

  Floating-point decimals consist in an integer part, a decimal part and an
exponent part.  The integer part is a sequence of one or more digits,
optionally preceded by a minus sign.  The decimal part is a decimal point
followed by zero, one or more digits.  The exponent part is the character e or
E followed by an optional + or - sign, followed by one or more digits.  The
decimal part or the exponent part can be omitted, but not both to avoid
ambiguity with integer literals.


Chapter 2.  The core Caml Light language                                    12


Character literals

               char-literal  ::= ` regular-char `
                               | ` \ (\ | ` | n | t | b | r) `
                               | ` \ (0...9) (0...9) (0...9) `

  Character literals are delimited by ` (backquote) characters.  The two
backquotes enclose either one character different from ` and \, or one of the
escape sequences below:
           --------------------------------------------------------
           |Sequence|Character denoted                            |
           --------------------------------------------------------
           |\\      |backslash (\)                                |
           |\`      |backquote (`)                                |
           |\n      |newline (LF)                                 |
           |\r      |return (CR)                                  |
           |\t      |horizontal tabulation (TAB)                  |
           |\b      |backspace (BS)                               |
           |\ddd    |the character with ASCII code ddd in decimal |
           --------------------------------------------------------

String literals

                 string-literal  ::= " {string-character} "
               string-character  ::= regular-char
                                   | \ (\ | " | n | t | b | r)
                                   | \ (0...9) (0...9) (0...9)

  String literals are delimited by " (double quote) characters.  The two
double quotes enclose a sequence of either characters different from " and \,
or escape sequences from the table below:
           --------------------------------------------------------
           |Sequence|Character denoted                            |
           --------------------------------------------------------
           |\\      |backslash (\)                                |
           |\"      |double quote (")                             |
           |\n      |newline (LF)                                 |
           |\r      |return (CR)                                  |
           |\t      |horizontal tabulation (TAB)                  |
           |\b      |backspace (BS)                               |
           |\ddd    |the character with ASCII code ddd in decimal |
           --------------------------------------------------------

                                                      16
  Implementations must support string literals up to 2  -1 characters in
length (65535 characters).

Keywords

The identifiers below are reserved as keywords, and cannot be employed
otherwise:

        and    as     begin       do      done      downto
        else   end    exception   for     fun       function
        if     in     let         match   mutable   not
        of     or     prefix      rec     then      to
        try    type   value       where   while     with

The following character sequences are also keywords:

        #    !    !=   &    (    )    *    *.   +    +.
        ,    -    -.   ->   .    .(   /    /.   :    ::


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   13


        :=   ;    ;;   <    <.   <-   <=   <=.  <>   <>.
        =    =.   ==   >    >.   >=   >=.  @    [    [|
        ]    ^    _    __   {    |    |]   }    '

Ambiguities

Lexical ambiguities are resolved according to the ``longest match'' rule:
when a character sequence can be decomposed into two tokens in several
different ways, the decomposition retained is the one with the longest first
token.


2.2 Global names

Global names are used to denote value variables, value constructors (constant
or non-constant), type constructors, and record labels.  Internally, a global
name consists of two parts:  the name of the defining module (the module
name), and the name of the global inside that module (the local name).  The
two parts of the name must be valid identifiers.  Externally, global names
have the following syntax:

                       global-name  ::= ident
                                      | ident __ ident

The form ident __ ident is called a qualified name.  The first identifier is
the module name, the second identifier is the local name.  The form ident is
called an unqualified name.  The identifier is the local name; the module name
is omitted.  The compiler infers this module name following the completion
rules given below, therefore transforming the unqualified name into a full
global name.
  To complete an unqualified identifier, the compiler checks a list of
modules, the opened modules, to see if they define a global with the same
local name as the unqualified identifier.  When one is found, the identifier
is completed into the full name of that global.  That is, the compiler takes
as module name the name of an opened module that defines a global with the
same local name as the unqualified identifier.  If several modules satisfy
this condition, the one that comes first in the list of opened modules is
selected.
  The list of opened modules always includes the module currently being
compiled (checked first).  (In the case of a toplevel-based implementation,
this is the module where all toplevel definitions are entered.)  It also
includes a number of standard library modules that provide the initial
environment (checked last).  In addition, the #open and #close directives can
be used to add or remove modules from that list.  The modules added with #open
are checked after the module currently being compiled, but before the initial
standard library modules.


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   14


              variable  ::=  global-name
                          |  prefix operator-name
         operator-name  ::=  + | - | * | / | mod | +. | -. | *. | /.
                          |  @ | ^ | ! | := | = | <> | == | != | !
                          |  < | <= | > | <= | <. | <=. | >. | <=.
               cconstr  ::=  global-name
                          |  []
                          |  ()
              ncconstr  ::=  global-name
                          |  prefix ::
            typeconstr  ::=  global-name
                 label  ::=  global-name

Depending on the context, global names can stand for global variables
(variable), constant value constructors (cconstr), non-constant value
constructors (ncconst), type constructors (typeconstr), or record labels
(label).  For variables and value constructors, special names built with
prefix and an operator name are recognized.  The tokens [] and () are also
recognized as built-in constant constructors (the empty list and the unit
value).
  The syntax of the language restricts labels and type constructors to appear
in certain positions, where no other kind of global names are accepted.  Hence
labels and type constructors have their own name spaces.  Value constructors
and value variables live in the same name space:  a global name in value
position is interpreted as a value constructor if it appears in the scope of a
type declaration defining that constructor; otherwise, the global name is
taken to be a value variable.  For value constructors, the type declaration
determines whether a constructor is constant or not.


2.3 Values

This section describes the kinds of values that are manipulated by Caml Light
programs.

2.3.1 Base values

Integer numbers

                                          30     30
Integer values are integer numbers from -2   to 2  -1, that is -1073741824
to 1073741823.  Implementations may support a wider range of integer values.

Floating-point numbers

Floating-point values are numbers in floating-point representation.
Everything about floating-point values is implementation-dependent, including
the range of representable numbers, the number of significant digits, and the
way floating-point results are rounded.

Characters

Character values are represented as 8-bit integers between 0 and 255.
Character codes between 0 and 127 are interpreted following the ASCII
standard.  The interpretation of character codes between 128 and 255 is
implementation-dependent.


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   15


Character strings

String values are finite sequences of characters.  Implementations must
                       16
support strings up to 2  -1 characters in length (65535 characters).
Implementations may support longer strings.

2.3.2 Tuples

Tuples of values are written (v1,...,vn), standing for the n-tuple of values
                            14
v1 to vn.  Tuples of up to 2  -1 elements (16383 elements) must be
supported, though implementations may support tuples with more elements.

2.3.3 Records

Record values are labeled tuples of values.  The record value written
{label1=v1 ;...;labeln =vn} associates the value vi to the record label
                                          14
labeli, for i=1...n.  Records with up to 2   -1 fields (16383 fields) must be
supported, though implementations may support records with more fields.

2.3.4 Arrays

Arrays are finite, variable-sized sequences of values of the same type.
                        14
Arrays of length up to 2  -1 (16383 elements) must be supported, though
implementations may support larger arrays.

2.3.5 Variant values

Variant values are either a constant constructor, or a pair of a non-constant
constructor and a value.  The former case is written cconstr; the latter case
is written ncconstr(v), where v is said to be the argument of the non-constant
constructor ncconstr.
  The following constants are treated like built-in constant constructors:
                        ------------------------------
                         Constant Constructor
                        ------------------------------
                         false    the boolean false
                         true     the boolean true
                         ()       the ``unit'' value
                         []       the empty list
                        ------------------------------

2.3.6 Functions

Functional values are mappings from values to values.


2.4 Type expressions

               typexpr  ::= ' ident
                          | ( typexpr )
                          | typexpr -> typexpr
                          | typexpr {* typexpr}+
                          | typeconstr
                          | typexpr typeconstr
                          | ( typexpr {, typexpr} ) typeconstr


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   16


  The table below shows the relative precedences and associativity of
operators and non-closed type constructions.  The constructions with higher
precedences come first.
                ---------------------------------------------
                |Operator                     |Associativity |
                ---------------------------------------------
                |Type constructor application |--            |
                |*                            |--            |
                |->                           |right         |
                ---------------------------------------------

  Type expressions denote types in definitions of data types as well as in
type constraints over patterns and expressions.

Type variables

The type expression ' ident stands for the type variable named ident.  In data
type definitions, type variables are names for the data type parameters.  In
type constraints, they represent unspecified types that can be instantiated by
any type to satisfy the type constraint.

Parenthesized types

The type expression ( typexpr ) denotes the same type as typexpr.

Function types

The type expression typexpr1 -> typexpr2 denotes the type of functions
mapping arguments of type typexpr1 to results of type typexpr2.

Tuple types

The type expression typexpr1 *...* typexprn denotes the type of tuples whose
elements belong to types typexpr1,...typexprn respectively.

Constructed types

Type constructors with no parameter, as in typeconstr, are type expressions.
  The type expression typexpr typeconstr, where typeconstr is a type
constructor with one parameter, denotes the application of the unary type
constructor typeconstr to the type typexpr.
  The type expression (typexpr1,...,typexprn) typeconstr, where typeconstr is
a type constructor with n parameters, denotes the application of the n-ary
type constructor typeconstr to the types typexpr1 through typexprn.

2.5 Constants

                        constant  ::= integer-literal
                                    | float-literal
                                    | char-literal
                                    | string-literal
                                    | cconstr

  The syntactic class of constants comprises literals from the four base types
(integers, floating-point numbers, characters, character strings), and
constant constructors.


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   17


2.6 Patterns

            pattern  ::=  ident
                       |  _
                       |  pattern as ident
                       |  ( pattern )
                       |  ( pattern : typexpr )
                       |  pattern | pattern
                       |  constant
                       |  ncconstr pattern
                       |  pattern , pattern {, pattern}
                       |  { label = pattern {; label = pattern} }
                       |  [ ]
                       |  [ pattern {; pattern} ]
                       |  pattern :: pattern

  The table below shows the relative precedences and associativity of
operators and non-closed pattern constructions.  The constructions with higher
precedences come first.
                   ----------------------------------------
                   |Operator               |Associativity |
                   ----------------------------------------
                   |Constructor application|--            |
                   |::                     |right         |
                   |,                      |--            |
                   ||                      |left          |
                   |as                     |--            |
                   ----------------------------------------

  Patterns are templates that allow selecting data structures of a given
shape, and binding identifiers to components of the data structure.  This
selection operation is called pattern matching; its outcome is either ``this
value does not match this pattern'', or ``this value matches this pattern,
resulting in the following bindings of identifiers to values''.

Variable patterns

A pattern that consists in an identifier matches any value, binding the
identifier to the value.  The pattern _ also matches any value, but does not
bind any identifier.

Alias patterns

The pattern pattern1 as ident matches the same values as pattern1.  If the
matching against pattern1 is successful, the identifier ident is bound to the
matched value, in addition to the bindings performed by the matching against
pattern1.

Parenthesized patterns

The pattern ( pattern1 ) matches the same values as pattern1.  A type
constraint can appear in a parenthesized patterns, as in
( pattern1 : typexpr ).  This constraint forces the type of pattern1 to be
compatible with type.

``Or'' patterns

The pattern pattern1 | pattern2 represents the logical ``or'' of the two
patterns pattern1 and pattern2.  A value matches pattern1 | pattern2 either
if it matches pattern1 or if it matches pattern2.  The two sub-patterns


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   18


pattern1 and pattern2 must contain no identifiers.  Hence no bindings are
returned by matching against an ``or'' pattern.

Constant patterns

A pattern consisting in a constant matches the values that are equal to this
constant.

Variant patterns

The pattern ncconstr pattern1 matches all variants whose constructor is equal
to ncconstr, and whose argument matches pattern1.
  The pattern pattern1 :: pattern2 matches non-empty lists whose heads match
pattern1, and whose tails match pattern2.  This pattern behaves like
prefix :: ( pattern1 , pattern2 ).
  The pattern [ pattern1 ;...; patternn ] matches lists of length n whose
elements match pattern1 ...patternn, respectively.  This pattern behaves like
pattern1 ::...:: patternn :: [].

Tuple patterns

The pattern pattern1 ,..., patternn matches n-tuples whose components match
the patterns pattern1 through patternn.  That is, the pattern matches the
tuple values (v1,...,vn) such that patterni matches vi for i =1, ...,n.

Record patterns

The pattern { label1 = pattern1 ;...; labeln = patternn } matches records
that define at least the labels label1 through labeln, and such that the
value associated to labeli match the pattern patterni, for i= 1,...,n.  The
record value can define more labels than label1 ...labeln; the values
associated to these extra labels are not taken into account for matching.


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   19


2.7 Expressions


             expr  ::=  ident
                     |  variable
                     |  constant
                     |  ( expr )
                     |  begin expr end
                     |  ( expr : typexpr )
                     |  expr , expr {, expr}
                     |  ncconstr expr
                     |  expr :: expr
                     |  [ expr {; expr} ]
                     |  [| expr {; expr} |]
                     |  { label = expr {; label = expr} }
                     |  expr expr
                     |  prefix-op expr
                     |  expr infix-op expr
                     |  expr . label
                     |  expr . label <- expr
                     |  expr .( expr )
                     |  expr .( expr ) <- expr
                     |  expr & expr
                     |  expr or expr
                     |  if expr then expr [else expr]
                     |  while expr do expr done
                     |  for ident = expr (to | downto) expr do expr done
                     |  expr ; expr
                     |  match expr with simple-matching
                     |  fun multiple-matching
                     |  function simple-matching
                     |  try expr with simple-matching
                     |  let [rec] let-binding {and let-binding} in expr
  simple-matching  ::=  pattern -> expr {| pattern -> expr}
multiple-matching  ::=  pattern-list -> expr {| pattern-list -> expr}
     pattern-list  ::=  pattern {pattern}
      let-binding  ::=  pattern = expr
                     |  variable pattern-list = expr
        prefix-op  ::=  - | -. | !
         infix-op  ::=  + | - | * | / | mod | +. | -. | *. | /. | ** | @ | ^ | ! | :=
                     |  = | <> | == | != | < | <= | > | >= | <. | <=. | >. | >=.

  The table below shows the relative precedences and associativity of
operators and non-closed constructions.  The constructions with higher
precedence come first.


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   20

                ---------------------------------------------
                |Construction or operator     |Associativity |
                ---------------------------------------------
                |!                            |--            |
                |.   .(                       |--            |
                |function application         |left          |
                |constructor application      |--            |
                |-   -.  (prefix)             |--            |
                |**                           |right         |
                |mod                          |left          |
                |*   *.   /   /.              |left          |
                |+   +.   -   -.              |left          |
                |::                           |right         |
                |@ ^                          |right         |
                |comparisons (=  ==  <  etc.) |left          |
                |not                          |--            |
                |&                            |left          |
                |or                           |left          |
                |,                            |--            |
                |<-   :=                      |right         |
                |if                           |--            |
                |;                            |right         |
                |let match fun function try   |--            |
                ---------------------------------------------

2.7.1 Simple expressions

Constants

Expressions consisting in a constant evaluate to this constant.

Variables

Expressions consisting in a variable evaluate to the value bound to this
variable in the current evaluation environment.  The variable can be either a
qualified identifier or a simple identifier.  Qualified identifiers always
denote global variables.  Simple identifiers denote either a local variable,
if the identifier is locally bound, or a global variable, whose full name is
obtained by qualifying the simple identifier, as described in section 2.2.

Parenthesized expressions

The expressions ( expr ) and begin expr end have the same value as expr.  Both
constructs are semantically equivalent, but it is good style to use
begin...end inside control structures:

        if ... then begin ... ; ... end else begin ... ; ... end

and (...) for the other grouping situations.
  Parenthesized expressions can contain a type constraint, as in
( expr : type ).  This constraint forces the type of expr to be compatible
with type.


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   21


Function abstraction

The most general form of function abstraction is:

                                1            m
                    fun  pattern1 ... pattern1  -> expr1
                      |  ...    1            m
                      |  patternn ... patternn  -> exprn

 This expression evaluates to a functional value with m curried arguments.
When this function is applied to m values v1 ... vm, the values are matched
                                1          m
against each pattern row patterni...patterni for i from 1 to n.  If one of
these matchings succeeds, that is if the value vj matches the pattern
       j
patterni for all j=1, ...,m, then the expression expri associated to the
selected pattern row is evaluated, and its value becomes the value of the
function application.  The evaluation of expri takes place in an environment
enriched by the bindings performed during the matching.
  If several pattern rows match the arguments, the one that occurs first in
the function definition is selected.  If none of the pattern rows matches the
argument, the exception Match_failure is raised.
  If the function above is applied to less than m arguments, a functional
value is returned, that represents the partial application of the function to
the arguments provided.  This partial application is a function that, when
applied to the remaining arguments, matches all arguments against the pattern
rows as described above.  Matching does not start until all m arguments have
been provided to the function; hence, partial applications of the function to
less than m arguments never raise Match_failure.
  All pattern rows in the function body must contain the same number of
patterns.  A variable must not be bound more than once in one pattern row.
  Functions with only one argument can be defined with the function keyword
instead of fun:

                        function  pattern1  -> expr1
                               |  ...
                               |  patternn  -> exprn

 The function thus defined behaves exactly as described above.  The only
difference between the two forms of function definition is how a parsing
ambiguity is resolved.  The two forms cconstr  pattern (two patterns in a row)
and ncconstr  pattern (one pattern) cannot be distinguished syntactically.
Function definitions introduced by fun resolve the ambiguity to the former
form; function definitions introduced by function resolve it to the latter
form (the former form makes no sense in this case).

Function application

Function application is denoted by juxtaposition of expressions.  The
expression expr1 expr2...exprn evaluates the expressions expr1 to exprn.  The
expression expr1 must evaluate to a functional value, which is then applied
to the values of expr2,...,exprn.  The order in which the expressions
expr1,...,exprn are evaluated is not specified.

Local definitions

The let and let rec constructs bind variables locally.  The construct


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   22


           let pattern1 = expr1 and...and patternn = exprn in expr

evaluates expr1...exprn in some unspecified order, then matches their values
against the patterns pattern1...patternn.  If the matchings succeed, expr is
evaluated in the environment enriched by the bindings performed during
matching, and the value of expr is returned as the value of the whole let
expression.  If one of the matchings fails, the exception Match_failure is
raised.
  An alternate syntax is provided to bind variables to functional values:
instead of writing

                   ident = fun pattern1...patternm -> expr

in a let expression, one may instead write

                      ident pattern1 ...patternm = expr

Both forms bind ident to the curried function with m arguments and only one
case,

                        pattern1 ...patternm -> expr.


Recursive definitions of variables are introduced by let rec:

         let rec pattern1 = expr1 and...and patternn = exprn in expr

The only difference with the let construct described above is that the
bindings of variables to values performed by the pattern-matching are
considered already performed when the expressions expr1 to exprn are
evaluated.  That is, the expressions expr1 to exprn can reference identifiers
that are bound by one of the patterns pattern1,...,patternn, and expect them
to have the same value as in expr, the body of the let rec construct.
  The recursive definition is guaranteed to behave as described above if the
expressions expr1 to exprn are function definitions (fun... or function...),
and the patterns pattern1...patternn consist in a single variable, as in:

           let rec ident1 = fun...and...and identn = fun...in expr

This defines ident1...identn as mutually recursive functions local to expr.
The behavior of other forms of let rec definitions is
implementation-dependent.

2.7.2 Control constructs

Sequence

The expression expr1 ; expr2 evaluates expr1 first, then expr2, and returns
the value of expr2.

Conditional

The expression if expr1 then expr2 else expr3 evaluates to the value of expr2
if expr1 evaluates to the boolean true, and to the value of expr3 if expr1
evaluates to the boolean false.
  The else expr3 part can be omitted, in which case it defaults to else ().


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   23


Case expression

The expression

                          match  expr
                           with  pattern1 ->  expr1
                              |  ...
                              |  patternn ->  exprn

 matches the value of expr against the patterns pattern1 to patternn.  If the
matching against patterni succeeds, the associated expression expri is
evaluated, and its value becomes the value of the whole match expression.  The
evaluation of expri takes place in an environment enriched by the bindings
performed during matching.  If several patterns match the value of expr, the
one that occurs first in the match expression is selected.  If none of the
patterns match the value of expr, the exception Match_failure is raised.

Boolean operators

The expression expr1 & expr2 evaluates to true if both expr1 and expr2
evaluate to true; otherwise, it evaluates to false.  The first component,
expr1, is evaluated first.  The second component, expr2, is not evaluated if
the first component evaluates to false.  Hence, the expression expr1 & expr2
behaves exactly as

                       if expr1 then expr2 else false.

  The expression expr1 or expr2 evaluates to true if one of expr1 and expr2
evaluates to true; otherwise, it evaluates to false.  The first component,
expr1, is evaluated first.  The second component, expr2, is not evaluated if
the first component evaluates to true.  Hence, the expression expr1 or expr2
behaves exactly as

                       if expr1  then true else expr2.

Loops

The expression while expr1 do expr2 done repeatedly evaluates expr2 while
expr1 evaluates to true.  The loop condition expr1 is evaluated and tested at
the beginning of each iteration.  The whole while...done expression evaluates
to the unit value ().
  The expression for ident = expr1 to expr2 do expr3 done first evaluates the
expressions expr1 and expr2 (the boundaries) into integer values n and p.
Then, the loop body expr3 is repeatedly evaluated in an environment where the
local variable named ident is successively bound to the values  n, n+1, ...,
p-1, p.  The loop body is never evaluated if n >p.
  The expression for ident = expr1 downto expr2 do expr3 done first evaluates
the expressions expr1 and expr2 (the boundaries) into integer values n and p.
Then, the loop body expr3 is repeatedly evaluated in an environment where the
local variable named ident is successively bound to the values  n, n-1, ...,
p+1, p.  The loop body is never evaluated if n <p.
  In both cases, the whole for expression evaluates to the unit value ().


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   24


Exception handling

The expression

                          try   expr
                          with  pattern1  -> expr1
                             |  ...
                             |  patternn  -> exprn

 evaluates the expression expr and returns its value if the evaluation of expr
does not raise any exception.  If the evaluation of expr raises an exception,
the exception value is matched against the patterns pattern1 to patternn.  If
the matching against patterni succeeds, the associated expression expri is
evaluated, and its value becomes the value of the whole try expression.  The
evaluation of expri takes place in an environment enriched by the bindings
performed during matching.  If several patterns match the value of expr, the
one that occurs first in the try expression is selected.  If none of the
patterns matches the value of expr, the exception value is raised again,
thereby transparently ``passing through'' the try construct.

2.7.3 Operations on data structures

Products

The expression expr1 ,..., exprn evaluates to the n-tuple of the values of
expressions expr1 to exprn.  The evaluation order for the subexpressions is
not specified.

Variants

The expression ncconstr expr evaluates to the variant value whose constructor
is ncconstr, and whose argument is the value of expr.
  For lists, some syntactic sugar is provided.  The expression expr1 :: expr2
stands for the constructor prefix :: applied to the argument
( expr1 , expr2 ), and therefore evaluates to the list whose head is the
value of expr1 and whose tail is the value of expr2.  The expression
[ expr1 ;...; exprn ] is equivalent to expr1 ::...:: exprn :: [], and
therefore evaluates to the list whose elements are the values of expr1 to
exprn.

Records

The expression { label1 = expr1 ;...; labeln = exprn } evaluates to the
record value { label1 = v1 ;...; labeln = vn }, where vi is the value of
expri for i=1, ...,n.  The labels label1 to labeln must all belong to the
same record types; all labels belonging to this record type must appear
exactly once in the record expression, though they can appear in any order.
The order in which expr1 to exprn are evaluated is not specified.
  The expression expr1 . label evaluates expr1 to a record value, and returns
the value associated to label in this record value.
  The expression expr1 . label <- expr2 evaluates expr1 to a record value,
which is then modified in-place by replacing the value associated to label in
this record by the value of expr2.  This operation is permitted only if label
has been declared mutable in the definition of the record type.  The whole
expression expr1 . label <- expr2 evaluates to the unit value ().


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   25


Arrays

The expression [| expr1 ;...; exprn |] evaluates to a n-element array, whose
elements are initialized with the values of expr1 to exprn respectively.  The
order in which these expressions are evaluated is unspecified.
  The expression expr1 .( expr2 ) is equivalent to the application
vect_item expr1 expr2.  In the initial environment, the identifier vect_item
resolves to a built-in function that returns the value of element number
expr2 in the array denoted by expr1.  The first element has number 0; the
last element has number n-1, where n is the size of the array.  The exception
Invalid_argument is raised if the access is out of bounds.
  The expression expr1 .( expr2 ) <- expr3 is equivalent to
vect_assign expr1 expr2 expr3.  In the initial environment, the identifier
vect_assign resolves to a built-in function that modifies in-place the array
denoted by expr1, replacing element number expr2 by the value of expr3.  The
exception Invalid_argument is raised if the access is out of bounds.  The
built-in function returns ().  Hence, the whole expression
expr1 .( expr2 ) <- expr3 evaluates to the unit value ().
  This behavior of the two constructs expr1 .( expr2 ) and
expr1 .( expr2 ) <- expr3 may change if the meaning of the identifiers
vect_item and vect_assign is changed, either by redefinition or by
modification of the list of opened modules.  See the discussion below on
operators.

2.7.4 Operators

The operators written infix-op in the grammar above can appear in infix
position (between two expressions).  The operators written prefix-op in the
grammar above can appear in prefix position (in front of an expression).
  The expression prefix-op expr is interpreted as the application ident expr,
where ident is the identifier associated to the operator prefix-op in the
table below.  Similarly, the expression expr1 infix-op expr2 is interpreted
as the application ident expr1 expr2, where ident is the identifier
associated to the operator infix-op in the table below.  The identifiers
written ident above are then evaluated following the rules in section 2.7.1.
In the initial environment, they evaluate to built-in functions whose behavior
is described in the table.  The behavior of the constructions prefix-op expr
and expr1 infix-op expr2 may change if the meaning of the identifiers
associated to prefix-op or infix-op is changed, either by redefinition of the
identifiers, or by modification of the list of opened modules, through the
#open and #close directives.


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   26

 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 |Operator     |Associated  |Behavior in the default environment            |
 |             |identifier  |                                               |
 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 |+            |prefix +    |Integer addition.                              |
 |- (infix)    |prefix -    |Integer subtraction.                           |
 |- (prefix)   |minus       |Integer negation.                              |
 |*            |prefix *    |Integer multiplication.                        |
 |/            |prefix /    |Integer division.   Raise  Division_by_zero if |
 |             |            |second  argument  is  zero.    The  result  is |
 |             |            |unspecified if either argument is negative.    |
 |mod          |prefix mod  |Integer modulus.    Raise Division_by_zero  if |
 |             |            |second  argument  is  zero.    The  result  is |
 |             |            |unspecified if either argument is negative.    |
 |+.           |prefix +.   |Floating-point addition.                       |
 |-.  (infix)  |prefix -.   |Floating-point subtraction.                    |
 |-.  (prefix) |minus_float |Floating-point negation.                       |
 |*.           |prefix *.   |Floating-point multiplication.                 |
 |/.           |prefix /.   |Floating-point   division.       Raise   Divi- |
 |             |            |sion_by_zero if second argument is zero.       |
 |**           |prefix **   |Floating-point exponentiation.                 |
 |@            |prefix @    |List concatenation.                            |
 |^            |prefix ^    |String concatenation.                          |
 |!            |prefix !    |Dereferencing (return the  current contents of |
 |             |            |a reference).                                  |
 |:=           |prefix :=   |Reference  assignment  (update  the  reference |
 |             |            |given as first argument with  the value of the |
 |             |            |second argument).                              |
 |=            |prefix =    |Structural equality test.                      |
 |<>           |prefix <>   |Structural inequality test.                    |
 |==           |prefix ==   |Physical equality test.                        |
 |!=           |prefix !=   |Physical inequality test.                      |
 |<            |prefix <    |Test ``less than'' on integers.                |
 |<=           |prefix <=   |Test ``less than or equal '' on integers.      |
 |>            |prefix >    |Test ``greater than'' on integers.             |
 |>=           |prefix >=   |Test ``greater than or equal'' on integers.    |
 |<.           |prefix <.   |Test ``less than'' on floating-point numbers.  |
 |<=.          |prefix <=.  |Test ``less than or equal '' on floating-point |
 |             |            |numbers.                                       |
 |>.           |prefix >.   |Test   ``greater  than''   on   floating-point |
 |             |            |numbers.                                       |
 |>=.          |prefix >=.  |Test ``greater  than or  equal'' on  floating- |
 |             |            |point numbers.                                 |
 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------

  The behavior of the +, -, *, /, mod, +., -., *.  or /.  operators is
unspecified if the result falls outside of the range of representable integers
or floating-point numbers, respectively.  See chapter 13 for a more precise
description of the behavior of the operators above.


2.8 Global definitions

This section describes the constructs that bind global identifiers (value
variables, value constructors, type constructors, record labels).


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   27


2.8.1 Type definitions

   type-definition  ::=  type typedef {and typedef}
           typedef  ::=  type-params ident = constr-decl {| constr-decl}
                      |  type-params ident = { label-decl {; label-decl} }
                      |  type-params ident == typexpr
                      |  type-params ident
       type-params  ::=  nothing
                      |  ' ident
                      |  ( ' ident {, ' ident} )
       constr-decl  ::=  ident
                      |  ident of typexpr
        label-decl  ::=  ident : typexpr
                      |  mutable ident : typexpr

  Type definitions bind type constructors to data types:  either variant
types, record types, type abbreviations, or abstract data types.
  Type definitions are introduced by the type keyword, and consist in one or
several simple definitions, possibly mutually recursive, separated by the and
keyword.  Each simple definition defines one type constructor.
  A simple definition consists in an identifier, possibly preceded by one or
several type parameters, and followed by a data type description.  The
identifier is the local name of the type constructor being defined.  (The
module name for this type constructor is the name of the module being
compiled.)  The optional type parameters are either one type variable ' ident,
for type constructors with one parameter, or a list of type variables
(' ident1,...,' identn), for type constructors with several parameters.
These type parameters can appear in the type expressions of the right-hand
side of the definition.

Variant types

The type definition typeparams ident = constr-decl1 |...| constr-decln
defines a variant type.  The constructor declarations
constr-decl1,...,constr-decln describe the constructors associated to this
variant type.  The constructor declaration ident of typexpr declares the local
name ident (in the module being compiled) as a non-constant constructor, whose
argument has type typexpr.  The constructor declaration ident declares the
local name ident (in the module being compiled) as a constant constructor.

Record types

The type definition typeparams ident = { label-decl1 ;...; label-decln }
defines a record type.  The label declarations label-decl1,...,label-decln
describe the labels associated to this record type.  The label declaration
ident : typexpr declares the local name ident in the module being compiled as
a label, whose argument has type typexpr.  The label declaration
mutable ident : typexpr behaves similarly; in addition, it allows physical
modification over the argument to this label.

Type abbreviations

The type definition typeparams ident == typexpr defines the type constructor
ident as an abbreviation for the type expression typexpr.


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   28


Abstract types

The type definition typeparams ident defines ident as an abstract type.  When
appearing in a module interface, this definition allows exporting a type
constructor while hiding how it is represented in the module implementation.

2.8.2 Exception definitions

      exception-definition  ::= exception constr-decl {and constr-decl}

  Exception definitions add new constructors to the built-in variant type exn
of exception values.  The constructors are declared as for a definition of a
variant type.


2.9 Directives

                        directive  ::= # open string
                                     | # close string
                                     | # ident string

  Directives control the behavior of the compiler.  They apply to the
remainder of the current compilation unit.
  The two directives #open and #close modify the list of opened modules, that
the compiler uses to complete unqualified identifiers, as described in
section 2.2.  The directive #open string adds the module whose name is given
by the string constant string to the list of opened modules, in first
position.  The directive #close string removes the first occurrence of the
module whose name is given by the string constant string from the list of
opened modules.
  Implementations can provide other directives, provided they follow the
syntax # ident string, where ident is the name of the directive, and the
string constant string is the argument to the directive.  The behavior of
these additional directives is implementation-dependent.


2.10 Module implementations

          implementation  ::= {impl-phrase ;;}
             impl-phrase  ::= expr
                            | value-definition
                            | type-definition
                            | exception-definition
                            | directive
        value-definition  ::= let [rec] let-binding {and let-binding}

  A module implementation consists in a sequence of implementation phrases,
terminated by double semicolons.  An implementation phrase is either an
expression, a value definition, a type or exception definition, or a
directive.  At run-time, implementation phrases are evaluated sequentially, in
the order in which they appear in the module implementation.
  Implementation phrases consisting in an expression are evaluated for their
side-effects.
  Value definitions bind global value variables in the same way as a
let...in... expression binds local variables.  The expressions are evaluated,
and their values are matched against the left-hand sides of the = sides, as
explained in section 2.7.1.  If the matching succeeds, the bindings of
identifiers to values performed during matching are interpreted as bindings to
the global value variables whose local name is the identifier, and whose


Chapter 2.   The core Caml Light language                                   29


module name is the name of the module.  If the matching fails, the exception
Match_failure is raised.  The scope of these bindings is the phrases that
follow the value definition in the module implementation.
  Type and exception definitions introduce type constructors, variant
constructors and record labels as described in sections 2.8.1 and 2.8.2.  The
scope of these definitions is the phrases that follow the value definition in
the module implementation.  The evaluation of an implementation phrase
consisting in a type or exception definition produces no effect at run-time.
  Directives modify the behavior of the compiler on the subsequent phrases of
the module implementation, as described in section 2.9.  The evaluation of an
implementation phrase consisting in a directive produces no effect at
run-time.  Directives apply only to the module currently being compiled; in
particular, they have no effect on other modules that refer to globals
exported by the module being compiled.


2.11 Module interfaces

             interface  ::=  {intf-phrase ;;}
           intf-phrase  ::=  value-declaration
                          |  type-definition
                          |  exception-definition
                          |  directive
     value-declaration  ::=  value ident : typexpr {and ident : typexpr}

  Module interfaces declare the global objects (value variables, type
constructors, variant constructors, record labels) that a module exports, that
is, makes available to other modules.  Other modules can refer to these
globals using qualified identifiers or the #open directive, as explained in
section 2.2.
  A module interface consists in a sequence of interface phrases, terminated
by double semicolons.  An interface phrase is either a value declaration, a
type definition, an exception definition, or a directive.
  Value declarations declare global value variables that are exported by the
module implementation, and the types with which they are exported.  The module
implementation must define these variables, with types at least as general as
the types declared in the interface.  The scope of the bindings for these
global variables extends from the module implementation itself to all modules
that refer to those variables.
  Type or exception definitions introduce type constructors, variant
constructors and record labels as described in sections 2.8.1 and 2.8.2.
Exception definitions and type definitions that are not abstract type
declarations also take effect in the module implementation; that is, the type
constructors, variant constructors and record labels they define are
considered bound on entrance to the module implementation, and can be referred
to by the implementation phrases.  Type definitions that are not abstract type
declarations must not be redefined in the module implementation.  In contrast,
the type constructors that are declared abstract in a module interface must be
defined in the module implementation, with the same names.
  Directives modify the behavior of the compiler on the subsequent phrases of
the module interface, as described in section 2.9.  Directives apply only to
the interface currently being compiled; in particular, they have no effect on
other modules that refer to globals exported by the interface being compiled.











Chapter 3



Language extensions



This chapter describes the language features that are implemented in Caml
Light, but not described in the Caml Light reference manual.  In contrast with
the fairly stable kernel language that is described in the reference manual,
the extensions presented here are still experimental, and may be removed or
changed in the future.


3.1 Streams, parsers, and printers

Caml Light comprises a built-in type for streams (possibly infinite sequences
of elements, that are evaluated on demand), and associated stream expressions,
to build streams, and stream patterns, to destructure streams.  Streams and
stream patterns provide a natural approach to the writing of recursive-descent
parsers.
  Streams are presented by the following extensions to the syntactic classes
of expressions:

               expr  ::= ...
                       | [< >]
                       | [< stream-component {; stream-component} >]
                       | function stream-matching
                       | match expr with stream-matching
   stream-component  ::= ' expr
                       | expr
    stream-matching  ::= stream-pattern -> expr {| stream-pattern -> expr}
     stream-pattern  ::= [< >]
                       | [< stream-comp-pat {; stream-comp-pat} >]
    stream-comp-pat  ::= ' pattern
                       | expr pattern
                       | ident


  Stream expressions are bracketed by [< and >].  They represent the
concatenation of their components.  The component ' expr represents the
one-element stream whose element is the value of expr.  The component expr
represents a sub-stream.  For instance, if both s and t are streams of
integers, then [<'1; s; t; '2>] is a stream of integers containing the element
1, then the elements of s, then those of t, and finally 2.  The empty stream
is denoted by [< >].
  Unlike any other kind of expressions in the language, stream expressions are
submitted to lazy evaluation:  the components are not evaluated when the
stream is built, but only when they are accessed during stream matching.  The
components are evaluated once, the first time they are accessed; the following


                                      30


Chapter 3.   Language extensions                                            31


accesses reuse the value computed the first time.
  Stream patterns, also bracketed by [< and >], describe initial segments of
streams.  In particular, the stream pattern [< >] matches all streams.  Stream
pattern components are matched against the corresponding elements of a stream.
The component ' pattern matches the corresponding stream element against the
pattern.  The component expr pattern applies the function denoted by expr to
the current stream, then matches the result of the function against pattern.
Finally, the component ident simply binds the identifier to the stream being
matched.  (The current implementation limits ident to appear last in a stream
pattern.)
  Stream matching proceeds destructively:  once a component has been matched,
it is discarded from the stream (by in-place modification).
  Stream matching proceeds in two steps:  first, a pattern is selected by
matching the stream against the first components of the stream patterns; then,
the following components of the selected pattern are checked against the
stream.  If the following components do not match, the exception Parse_error
is raised.  There is no backtracking here:  stream matching commits to the
pattern selected according to the first element.  If none of the first
components of the stream patterns match, the exception Parse_failure is
raised.  The Parse_failure exception causes the next alternative to be tried,
if it occurs during the matching of the first element of a stream, before
matching has committed to one pattern.
  See Functional programming using Caml Light for a more gentle introductions
to streams, and for some examples of their use in writing parsers.  A more
formal presentation of streams, and a discussion of alternate semantics, can
be found in Parsers in ML by Michel Mauny and Daniel de Rauglaudre, in the
proceedings of the 1992 ACM conference on Lisp and Functional Programming.


3.2 Guards

Cases of a pattern matching can include guard expressions, which are arbitrary
boolean expressions that must evaluate to true for the match case to be
selected.  Guards occur just before the -> token and are introduced by the
when keyword:

                    match  expr
                     with  pattern1[whencond1]  -> expr1
                        |  ...
                        |  patternn[whencondn]  -> exprn

 (Same syntax for the fun, function, and try ...with constructs.)  During
matching, if the value of expr matches some pattern patterni which has a
guard condi, then the expression condi is evaluated (in an environment
enriched by the bindings performed during matching).  If condi evaluates to
true, then expri is evaluated and its value returned as the result of the
matching, as usual.  But if condi evaluates to false, the matching is resumed
against the patterns following patterni.

3.3 Range patterns

In patterns, Caml Light recognizes the form ` c ` .. ` d ` (two character
constants separated by ..) as a shorthand for the pattern

                ` c ` | ` c1 ` | ` c2  ` |...| ` cn ` | ` d `


Chapter 3.   Language extensions                                            32


where c1,c2,...,cn  are the characters that occur between c and d in the
ASCII character set.  For instance, the pattern `0`..`9` matches all
characters that are digits.


3.4 Recursive definitions of values

Besides let rec definitions of functional values, as described in the
reference manual, Caml Light supports a certain class of recursive definitions
of non-functional values.  For instance, the following definition is accepted:

        let rec x = 1 :: y and y = 2 :: x;;

and correctly binds x to the cyclic list 1::2::1::2::..., and y to the cyclic
list 2::1::2::1::...Informally, the class of accepted definitions consists of
those definitions where the defined variables occur only inside function
bodies or as a field of a data structure.  Moreover, the patterns in the
left-hand sides must be identifiers, nothing more complex.


3.5 Local definitions using where

A postfix syntax for local definitions is provided:

                   expr  ::=  ...
                           |  expr where [rec] let-binding


The expression expr where let-binding behaves exactly as
let let-binding in expr, and similarly for where rec and let rec.


3.6 Mutable variant types

The argument of a value constructor can be declared ``mutable'' when the
variant type is defined:

        type foo = A of mutable int
                 | B of mutable int * int
                 | ...

This allows in-place modification of the argument part of a constructed value.
Modification is performed by a new kind of expressions, written ident <- expr,
where ident is an identifier bound by pattern-matching to the argument of a
mutable constructor, and expr denotes the value that must be stored in place
of that argument.  Continuing the example above:

        let x = A 1 in
          begin match x with A y -> y <- 2 | _ -> () end;
          x

returns the value A 2.  The notation ident <- expr works also if ident is an
identifier bound by pattern-matching to the value of a mutable field in a
record.  For instance,

        type bar = {mutable lbl : int};;
        let x = {lbl = 1} in
          begin match x with {lbl = y} -> y <- 2 end;
          x


Chapter 3.   Language extensions                                            33


returns the value {lbl = 2}.


3.7 String access

Extra syntactic constructs are provided to access and modify characters in
strings:

                      expr  ::=  ...
                              |  expr .[ expr ]
                              |  expr .[ expr ] <- expr

  The expression expr1 .[ expr2 ] is equivalent to the application
nth_char expr1 expr2.  In the initial environment, the identifier nth_char
resolves to a built-in function that returns the character number expr2 in
the string denoted by expr1.  The first element has number 0; the last
element has number n-1, where n is the length of the string.  The exception
Invalid_argument is raised if the access is out of bounds.
  The expression expr1 .[ expr2 ] <- expr3 is equivalent to
set_nth_char expr1 expr2 expr3.  In the initial environment, the identifier
set_nth_char resolves to a built-in function that modifies in-place the string
denoted by expr1, replacing character number expr2 by the value of expr3.
The exception Invalid_argument is raised if the access is out of bounds.  The
built-in function returns ().


3.8 Alternate syntax

The syntax of some constructs has been slightly relaxed:

 -  An optional ; may terminate a sequence, list expression, or record
    expression.  For instance, begin e1 ; e2 ; end is syntactically correct
    and synonymous with begin e1 ; e2 end.

 -  Similarly, an optional | may begin a pattern-matching expression.  For
    instance, function | pat1 -> expr1 |... is syntactically correct and
    synonymous with function pat1 -> expr1 |....

 -  The tokens && and || are recognized as synonymous for & (sequential
    ``and'') and or (sequential ``or''), respectively.


3.9 Infix symbols

Sequences of ``operator characters'', such as <=> or !!, are read as a single
token from the infix-symbol or prefix-symbol class:


 infix-symbol  ::=  (= | < | > | @ | ^ | | | & | ~ | + | - | * | / | $ | %) {operator-char}
prefix-symbol  ::=  (! | ?) {operator-char}
operator-char  ::=  ! | $ | % | & | * | + | - | . | / | : | ; | < | = | > | ? | @ | ^ | | | ~


Tokens from these two classes generalize the built-in infix and prefix
operators described in chapter 2:


Chapter 3.  Language extensions                                             34


                        expr  ::=  ...
                                |  prefix-symbol expr
                                |  expr infix-symbol expr
                    variable  ::=  ...
                                |  prefix prefix-symbol
                                |  prefix infix-symbol


No #infix directive (section 3.10) is needed to give infix symbols their infix
status.  The precedences and associativities of infix symbols in expressions
are determined by their first character(s):  symbols beginning with ** have
highest precedence (exponentiation), followed by symbols beginning with *, /
or % (multiplication), then + and - (addition), then @ and ^ (concatenation),
then all others symbols (comparisons).  The updated precedence table for
expressions is shown below.  We write ``*...''  to mean ``any infix symbol
starting with *''.
    ----------------------------------------------------------------------
    |Construction or operator                             |Associativity |
    ----------------------------------------------------------------------
    |!...   ?...                                          |--            |
    |.   .(   .[                                          |--            |
    |function application                                 |left          |
    |constructor application                              |--            |
    |-   -.  (prefix)                                     |--            |
    |**...                                                |right         |
    |*...   /...   %...   mod                             |left          |
    |+...   -...                                          |left          |
    |::                                                   |right         |
    |@...   ^...                                          |right         |
    |comparisons (=  ==  <  etc.), all other infix symbols|left          |
    |not                                                  |--            |
    |&   &&                                               |left          |
    |or  ||                                               |left          |
    |,                                                    |--            |
    |<-   :=                                              |right         |
    |if                                                   |--            |
    |;                                                    |right         |
    |let  match  fun  function  try                       |--            |
    ----------------------------------------------------------------------

Some infix and prefix symbols are predefined in the default environment (see
chapters 2 and 13 for a description of their behavior).  The others are
initially unbound and must be bound before use, with a
let prefix infix-symbol = expr or let prefix prefix-symbol = expr binding.


3.10 Directives

In addition to the standard #open and #close directives, Caml Light provides
three additional directives.

#infix " id "
    Change the lexical status of the identifier id:  in the remainder of the
    compilation unit, id is recognized as an infix operator, just like +.
    The notation prefix id can be used to refer to the identifier id itself.
    Expressions of the form expr1 id expr2 are parsed as the application
    prefix id expr1 expr2.  The argument to the #infix directive must be an
    identifier, that is, a sequence of letters, digits and underscores
    starting with a letter; otherwise, the #infix declaration has no effect.
    Example:


Chapter 3.   Language extensions                                            35


            #infix "union";;
            let prefix union = fun x y -> ... ;;
            [1,2] union [3,4];;


#uninfix " id "
    Remove the infix status attached to the identifier id by a previous
    #infix " id " directive.

#directory " dir-name "
    Add the named directory to the path of directories searched for compiled
    module interface files.  This is equivalent to the -I command-line option
    to the batch compiler and the toplevel system.
























                                   Part III



                           The Caml Light commands




































                                      36











Chapter 4



Batch compilation (camlc)



This chapter describes how Caml Light programs can be compiled
non-interactively, and turned into standalone executable files.  This is
achieved by the command camlc, which compiles and links Caml Light source
files.

Mac:  This command is not a standalone Macintosh application.  To run camlc,
      you need the Macintosh Programmer's Workshop (MPW) programming
      environment.  The programs generated by camlc are also MPW tools, not
      standalone Macintosh applications.


4.1 Overview of the compiler

The camlc command has a command-line interface similar to the one of most C
compilers.  It accepts several types of arguments:  source files for module
implementations; source files for module interfaces; and compiled module
implementations.

 -  Arguments ending in .mli are taken to be source files for module
    interfaces.  Module interfaces declare exported global identifiers,
    define public data types, and so on.  From the file x.mli, the camlc
    compiler produces a compiled interface in the file x.zi.

 -  Arguments ending in .ml are taken to be source files for module
    implementation.  Module implementations bind global identifiers to
    values, define private data types, and contain expressions to be
    evaluated for their side-effects.  From the file x.ml, the camlc compiler
    produces compiled object code in the file x.zo.  If the interface file
    x.mli exists, the module implementation x.ml is checked against the
    corresponding compiled interface x.zi, which is assumed to exist.  If no
    interface x.mli is provided, the compilation of x.ml produces a compiled
    interface file x.zi in addition to the compiled object code file x.zo.
    The file x.zi produced corresponds to an interface that exports
    everything that is defined in the implementation x.ml.

 -  Arguments ending in .zo are taken to be compiled object code.  These
    files are linked together, along with the object code files obtained by
    compiling .ml arguments (if any), and the Caml Light standard library, to
    produce a standalone executable program.  The order in which .zo and .ml
    arguments are presented on the command line is relevant:  global
    identifiers are initialized in that order at run-time, and it is a
    link-time error to use a global identifier before having initialized it.
    Hence, a given x.zo file must come before all .zo files that refer to


                                      37


Chapter 4.   Batch compilation (camlc)                                      38


    identifiers defined in the file x.zo.

  The output of the linking phase is a file containing compiled code that can
be executed by the Caml Light runtime system:  the command named camlrun.  If
caml.out is the name of the file produced by the linking phase, the command

        camlrun caml.out arg1 arg2 ... argn

executes the compiled code contained in caml.out, passing it as arguments the
character strings arg1 to argn.  (See chapter 6 for more details.)

Unix: On most Unix systems, the file produced by the linking phase can be run
      directly, as in:


              ./caml.out arg1 arg2 ... argn


      The produced file has the executable bit set, and it manages to launch
      the bytecode interpreter by itself.

PC:   The output file produced by the linking phase is directly executable,
      provided it is given extension .EXE. Hence, if the output file is named
      caml_out.exe, you can execute it with the command


              caml_out arg1 arg2 ... argn


      Actually, the produced file caml_out.exe is a tiny executable file
      prepended to the bytecode file.  The executable simply runs the camlrun
      runtime system on the remainder of the file.  (As a consequence, this
      is not a standalone executable:  it still requires camlrun.exe to
      reside in one of the directories in the path.)


4.2 Options

The following command-line options are recognized by camlc.

-c  Compile only.  Suppress the linking phase of the compilation.  Source
    code files are turned into compiled files, but no executable file is
    produced.  This option is useful to compile modules separately.

-ccopt option
    Pass the given option to the C compiler and linker, when linking in
    ``custom runtime'' mode (see the -custom option).  For instance, -ccopt
    -Ldir causes the C linker to search for C libraries in directory dir.

-custom
    Link in ``custom runtime'' mode.  In the default linking mode, the linker
    produces bytecode that is intended to be executed with the shared runtime
    system, camlrun.  In the custom runtime mode, the linker produces an
    output file that contains both the runtime system and the bytecode for
    the program.  The resulting file is considerably larger, but it can be
    executed directly, even if the camlrun command is not installed.
    Moreover, the ``custom runtime'' mode enables linking Caml Light code
    with user-defined C functions, as described in chapter 12.


Chapter 4.   Batch compilation (camlc)                                      39


    Unix: Never strip an executable produced with the -custom option.


    PC:   This option requires the DJGPP port of the GNU C compiler to be
          installed.


-g  Cause the compiler to produce additional debugging information.  During
    the linking phase, this option add information at the end of the
    executable bytecode file produced.  This information is required by the
    debugger camldebug and also by the catch-all exception handler from the
    standard library module printexc.

    During the compilation of an implementation file (.ml file), when the -g
    option is set, the compiler adds debugging information to the .zo file.
    It also writes a .zix file that describes the full interface of the .ml
    file, that is, all types and values defined in the .ml file, including
    those that are local to the .ml file (i.e.  not declared in the .mli
    interface file).  Used in conjunction with the -g option to the toplevel
    system (chapter 5), the .zix file gives access to the local values of the
    module, making it possible to print or ``trace'' them.  The .zix file is
    not produced if the implementation file has no explicit interface, since,
    in this case, the module has no local values.

-i  Cause the compiler to print the declared types, exceptions, and global
    variables (with their inferred types) when compiling an implementation
    (.ml file).  This can be useful to check the types inferred by the
    compiler.  Also, since the output follows the syntax of module
    interfaces, it can help in writing an explicit interface (.mli file) for
    a file:  just redirect the standard output of the compiler to a .mli
    file, and edit that file to remove all declarations of unexported
    globals.

-I directory
    Add the given directory to the list of directories searched for compiled
    interface files (.zi) and compiled object code files (.zo).  By default,
    the current directory is searched first, then the standard library
    directory.  Directories added with -I are searched after the current
    directory, but before the standard library directory.  When several
    directories are added with several -I options on the command line, these
    directories are searched from right to left (the rightmost directory is
    searched first, the leftmost is searched last).  (Directories can also be
    added to the search path from inside the programs with the #directory
    directive; see chapter 3.)

-lang language-code
    Translate the compiler messages to the specified language.  The
    language-code is fr for French, es for Spanish, de for German, ... (See
    the file camlmsgs.txt in the Caml Light standard library directory for a
    list of available languages.)  When an unknown language is specified, or
    no translation is available for a message, American English is used by
    default.

-o exec-file
    Specify the name of the output file produced by the linker.


    Unix: The default output name is a.out, in keeping with the tradition.


Chapter 4.   Batch compilation (camlc)                                      40


    PC:   The default output name is caml_out.exe.


    Mac:  The default output name is Caml.Out.


-O module-set
    Specify which set of standard modules is to be implicitly ``opened'' at
    the beginning of a compilation.  There are three module sets currently
    available:


     cautious
        provides the standard operations on integers, floating-point numbers,
        characters, strings, arrays, ..., as well as exception handling,
        basic input/output, etc.  Operations from the cautious set perform
        range and bound checking on string and array operations, as well as
        various sanity checks on their arguments.

     fast
        provides the same operations as the cautious set, but without sanity
        checks on their arguments.  Programs compiled with -O fast are
        therefore slightly faster, but unsafe.

     none
        suppresses all automatic opening of modules.  Compilation starts in
        an almost empty environment.  This option is not of general use,
        except to compile the standard library itself.


    The default compilation mode is -O cautious.  See chapter 13 for a
    complete listing of the modules in the cautious and fast sets.

-p  Compile and link in profiling mode.  See the description of the profiler
    camlpro in chapter 10.

-v  Print the version number of the compiler.

-W  Print extra warning messages for the following events:


     -  A #open directive is useless (no identifier in the opened module is
        ever referenced).

     -  A variable name in a pattern matching is capitalized (often
        corresponds to a misspelled constant constructor).


Unix: The following environment variable is also consulted:


      LANGWhen set, control which language is used to print the compiler
          messages (see the -lang command-line option).


PC:   The following option is also supported:


Chapter 4.   Batch compilation (camlc)                                      41


      @response-file
          Process the files whose names are listed in file response-file,
          just as if these names appeared on the command line.  File names in
          response-file are separated by blanks (spaces, tabs, newlines).
          This option allows to overcome silly limitations on the length of
          the command line.


      The following environment variables are also consulted:


      CAMLLIB
          Contain the path to the standard library directory.

      LANGWhen set, control which language is used to print the compiler
          messages (see the -lang command-line option).



4.3 Modules and the file system

This short section is intended to clarify the relationship between the names
of the modules and the names of the files that contain their compiled
interface and compiled implementation.
  The compiler always derives the name of the compiled module by taking the
base name of the source file (.ml or .mli file).  That is, it strips the
leading directory name, if any, as well as the .ml or .mli suffix.  The
produced .zi and .zo files have the same base name as the source file; hence,
the compiled files produced by the compiler always have their base name equal
to the name of the module they describe (for .zi files) or implement (for .zo
files).
  For compiled interface files (.zi files), this invariant must be preserved
at all times, since the compiler relies on it to load the compiled interface
file for the modules that are used from the module being compiled.  Hence, it
is risky and generally incorrect to rename .zi files.  It is admissible to
move them to another directory, if their base name is preserved, and the
correct -I options are given to the compiler.
  Compiled bytecode files (.zo files), on the other hand, can be freely
renamed once created.  That's because 1- .zo files contain the true name of
the module they define, so there is no need to derive that name from the file
name; 2- the linker never attempts to find by itself the .zo file that
implements a module of a given name:  it relies on the user providing the list
of .zo files by hand.


4.4 Common errors

This section describes and explains the most frequently encountered error
messages.

Cannot find file filename
    The named file could not be found in the current directory, nor in the
    directories of the search path.  The filename is either a compiled
    interface file (.zi file), or a compiled bytecode file (.zo file).  If
    filename has the format mod.zi, this means you are trying to compile a
    file that references identifiers from module mod, but you have not yet
    compiled an interface for module mod.  Fix:  compile mod.mli or mod.ml
    first, to create the compiled interface mod.zi.


Chapter 4.   Batch compilation (camlc)                                      42


    If filename has the format mod.zo, this means you are trying to link a
    bytecode object file that does not exist yet.  Fix:  compile mod.ml
    first.

    If your program spans several directories, this error can also appear
    because you haven't specified the directories to look into.  Fix:  add
    the correct -I options to the command line.

Corrupted compiled interface file filename
    The compiler produces this error when it tries to read a compiled
    interface file (.zi file) that has the wrong structure.  This means
    something went wrong when this .zi file was written:  the disk was full,
    the compiler was interrupted in the middle of the file creation, and so
    on.  This error can also appear if a .zi file is modified after its
    creation by the compiler.  Fix:  remove the corrupted .zi file, and
    rebuild it.

This expression has type t1, but is used with type t2
    This is by far the most common type error in programs.  Type t1 is the
    type inferred for the expression (the part of the program that is
    displayed in the error message), by looking at the expression itself.
    Type t2 is the type expected by the context of the expression; it is
    deduced by looking at how the value of this expression is used in the
    rest of the program.  If the two types t1 and t2 are not compatible, then
    the error above is produced.

    In some cases, it is hard to understand why the two types t1 and t2 are
    incompatible.  For instance, the compiler can report that ``expression of
    type foo cannot be used with type foo'', and it really seems that the two
    types foo are compatible.  This is not always true.  Two type
    constructors can have the same name, but actually represent different
    types.  This can happen if a type constructor is redefined.  Example:


            type foo = A | B;;
            let f = function A -> 0 | B -> 1;;
            type foo = C | D;;
            f C;;


    This result in the error message ``expression C of type foo cannot be
    used with type foo''.

    Incompatible types with the same names can also appear when a module is
    changed and recompiled, but some of its clients are not recompiled.
    That's because type constructors in .zi files are not represented by
    their name (that would not suffice to identify them, because of type
    redefinitions), but by unique stamps that are assigned when the type
    declaration is compiled.  Consider the three modules:


            mod1.ml:    type t = A | B;;
                        let f = function A -> 0 | B -> 1;;

            mod2.ml:    let g x = 1 + mod1__f(x);;

            mod3.ml:    mod2__g mod1__A;;


Chapter 4.  Batch compilation (camlc)                                       43


    Now, assume mod1.ml is changed and recompiled, but mod2.ml is not
    recompiled.  The recompilation of mod1.ml can change the stamp assigned
    to type t.  But the interface mod2.zi will still use the old stamp for
    mod1__t in the type of mod2__g.  Hence, when compiling mod3.ml, the
    system complains that the argument type of mod2__g (that is, mod1__t with
    the old stamp) is not compatible with the type of mod1__A (that is,
    mod1__t with the new stamp).  Fix:  use make or a similar tool to ensure
    that all clients of a module mod are recompiled when the interface mod.zi
    changes.  To check that the Makefile contains the right dependencies,
    remove all .zi files and rebuild the whole program; if no ``Cannot find
    file'' error appears, you're all set.


The type inferred for name, that is, t, contains non-generalizable type variables

    Type variables ('a, 'b, ...)  in a type t can be in either of two states:
    generalized (which means that the type t is valid for all possible
    instantiations of the variables) and not generalized (which means that
    the type t is valid only for one instantiation of the variables).  In a
    let binding let name = expr, the type-checker normally generalizes as
    many type variables as possible in the type of expr.  However, this leads
    to unsoundness (a well-typed program can crash) in conjunction with
    polymorphic mutable data structures.  To avoid this, generalization is
    performed at let bindings only if the bound expression expr belongs to
    the class of ``syntactic values'', which includes constants, identifiers,
    functions, tuples of syntactic values, etc.  In all other cases (for
    instance, expr is a function application), a polymorphic mutable could
    have been created and generalization is therefore turned off.

    Non-generalized type variables in a type cause no difficulties inside a
    given compilation unit (the contents of a .ml file, or an interactive
    session), but they cannot be allowed in types written in a .zi compiled
    interface file, because they could be used inconsistently in other
    compilation units.  Therefore, the compiler flags an error when a .ml
    implementation without a .mli interface defines a global variable name
    whose type contains non-generalized type variables.  There are two
    solutions to this problem:


     -  Add a type constraint or a .mli interface to give a monomorphic type
        (without type variables) to name.  For instance, instead of writing


            let sort_int_list = sort (prefix <);;
            (* inferred type 'a list -> 'a list, with 'a not generalized *)


        write


            let sort_int_list = (sort (prefix <) : int list -> int list);;


     -  If you really need name to have a polymorphic type, turn its defining
        expression into a function by adding an extra parameter.  For
        instance, instead of writing


Chapter 4.   Batch compilation (camlc)                                      44


            let map_length = map vect_length;;
            (*  inferred type 'a vect list ->  int list, with 'a not  general-
        ized *)


        write


                let map_length lv = map vect_length lv;;


mod__name is referenced before being defined
    This error appears when trying to link an incomplete or incorrectly
    ordered set of files.  Either you have forgotten to provide an
    implementation for the module named mod on the command line (typically,
    the file named mod.zo, or a library containing that file).  Fix:  add the
    missing .ml or .zo file to the command line.  Or, you have provided an
    implementation for the module named mod, but it comes too late on the
    command line:  the implementation of mod must come before all bytecode
    object files that reference one of the global variables defined in module
    mod.  Fix:  change the order of .ml and .zo files on the command line.

    Of course, you will always encounter this error if you have mutually
    recursive functions across modules.  That is, function mod1__f calls
    function mod2__g, and function mod2__g calls function mod1__f.  In this
    case, no matter what permutations you perform on the command line, the
    program will be rejected at link-time.  Fixes:


     -  Put f and g in the same module.

     -  Parameterize one function by the other.  That is, instead of having


        mod1.ml:    let f x = ... mod2__g ... ;;
        mod2.ml:    let g y = ... mod1__f ... ;;


        define


        mod1.ml:    let f g x = ... g ... ;;
        mod2.ml:    let rec g y = ... mod1__f g ... ;;


        and link mod1 before mod2.

     -  Use a reference to hold one of the two functions, as in :


        mod1.ml:    let forward_g =
                        ref((fun x -> failwith "forward_g") : <type>);;
                    let f x = ... !forward_g ... ;;
        mod2.ml:    let g y = ... mod1__f ... ;;
                    mod1__forward_g := g;;


Chapter 4.   Batch compilation (camlc)                                      45


Unavailable C primitive f
    This error appears when trying to link code that calls external functions
    written in C in ``default runtime'' mode.  As explained in chapter 12,
    such code must be linked in ``custom runtime'' mode.  Fix:  add the
    -custom option, as well as the (native code) libraries and (native code)
    object files that implement the required external functions.











Chapter 5



The toplevel system (camllight)



This chapter describes the toplevel system for Caml Light, that permits
interactive use of the Caml Light system, through a read-eval-print loop.  In
this mode, the system repeatedly reads Caml Light phrases from the input, then
typechecks, compile and evaluate them, then prints the inferred type and
result value, if any.  The system prints a # (sharp) prompt before reading
each phrase.  A phrase can span several lines.  Phrases are delimited by ;;
(the final double-semicolon).
  From the standpoint of the module system, all phrases entered at toplevel
are treated as the implementation of a module named top.  Hence, all toplevel
definitions are entered in the module top.

Unix: The toplevel system is started by the command camllight.  Phrases are
      read on standard input, results are printed on standard output, errors
      on standard error.  End-of-file on standard input terminates camllight
      (see also the quit system function below).

      The toplevel system does not perform line editing, but it can easily be
      used in conjunction with an external line editor such as fep; just run
      fep -emacs camllight or fep -vi camllight.  Another option is to use
      camllight under Gnu Emacs, which gives the full editing power of Emacs
      (see the directory contrib/camlmode in the distribution).

      At any point, the parsing, compilation or evaluation of the current
      phrase can be interrupted by pressing ctrl-C (or, more precisely, by
      sending the intr signal to the camllight process).  This goes back to
      the # prompt.

Mac:  The toplevel system is presented as the standalone Macintosh
      application Caml Light.  This application does not require the
      Macintosh Programmer's Workshop to run.

      Once launched from the Finder, the application opens two windows,
      ``Caml Light Input'' and ``Caml Light Output''.  Phrases are entered in
      the ``Caml Light Input'' window.  The ``Caml Light Output'' window
      displays a copy of the input phrases as they are processed by the Caml
      Light toplevel, interspersed with the toplevel responses.  The
      ``Return'' key sends the contents of the Input window to the Caml Light
      toplevel.  The ``Enter'' key inserts a newline without sending the
      contents of the Input window.  (This can be configured with the
      ``Preferences'' menu item.)

      The contents of the input window can be edited at all times, with the
      standard Macintosh interface.  An history of previously entered phrases


                                      46


Chapter 5.   The toplevel system (camllight)                                47


      is maintained, and can be accessed with the ``Previous entry''
      (command-P) and ``Next entry'' (command-N) menu items.

      To quit the Caml Light application, either select ``Quit'' from the
      ``Files'' menu, or use the quit function described below.

      At any point, the parsing, compilation or evaluation of the current
      phrase can be interrupted by pressing ``command-period'', or by
      selecting the item ``Interrupt Caml Light'' in the ``Caml Light'' menu.
      This goes back to the # prompt.

PC:   The toplevel system is presented as a Windows application named
      Camlwin.exe.  It should be launched from the Windows file manager or
      program manager.

      The ``Terminal'' windows is split in two panes.  Phrases are entered
      and edited in the bottom pane.  The top pane displays a copy of the
      input phrases as they are processed by the Caml Light toplevel,
      interspersed with the toplevel responses.  The ``Return'' key sends the
      contents of the bottom pane to the Caml Light toplevel.  The ``Enter''
      key inserts a newline without sending the contents of the Input window.
      (This can be configured with the ``Preferences'' menu item.)

      The contents of the input window can be edited at all times, with the
      standard Windows interface.  An history of previously entered phrases
      is maintained and displayed in a separate window.

      To quit the Camlwin application, either select ``Quit'' from the
      ``File'' menu, or use the quit function described below.

      At any point, the parsing, compilation or evaluation of the current
      phrase can be interrupted by selecting the ``Interrupt Caml Light''
      menu item.  This goes back to the # prompt.

      A text-only version of the toplevel system is available under the name
      caml.exe.  It runs under MSDOS as well as under Windows in a DOS
      window.  No editing facilities are provided.


5.1 Options

The following command-line options are recognized by the caml or camllight
commands.

-g  Start the toplevel system in debugging mode.  This mode gives access to
    values and types that are local to a module, that is, not exported by the
    interface of the module.  When debugging mode is off, these local objects
    are not accessible (attempts to access them produce an ``Unbound
    identifier'' error).  When debugging mode is on, these objects become
    visible, just like the objects that are exported in the module interface.
    In particular, values of abstract types are printed using their concrete
    representations, and the functions local to a module can be ``traced''
    (see the trace function in section 5.2).  This applies only to the
    modules that have been compiled in debugging mode (either by the batch
    compiler with the -g option, or by the toplevel system in debugging
    mode), that is, those modules that have an associated .zix file.


Chapter 5.   The toplevel system (camllight)                                48


-I directory
    Add the given directory to the list of directories searched for compiled
    interface files (.zi) and compiled object code files (.zo).  By default,
    the current directory is searched first, then the standard library
    directory.  Directories added with -I are searched after the current
    directory, but before the standard library directory.  When several
    directories are added with several -I options on the command line, these
    directories are searched from right to left (the rightmost directory is
    searched first, the leftmost is searched last).  Directories can also be
    added to the search path once the toplevel is running with the #directory
    directive; see chapter 3.

-lang language-code
    Translate the toplevel messages to the specified language.  The
    language-code is fr for French, es for Spanish, de for German, ... (See
    the file camlmsgs.txt in the Caml Light standard library directory for a
    list of available languages.)  When an unknown language is specified, or
    no translation is available for a message, American English is used by
    default.

-O module-set
    Specify which set of standard modules is to be implicitly ``opened'' when
    the toplevel starts.  There are three module sets currently available:


    cautious
        provides the standard operations on integers, floating-point numbers,
        characters, strings, arrays, ..., as well as exception handling,
        basic input/output, ...Operations from the cautious set perform range
        and bound checking on string and vector operations, as well as
        various sanity checks on their arguments.

    fast
        provides the same operations as the cautious set, but without sanity
        checks on their arguments.  Programs compiled with -O fast are
        therefore slightly faster, but unsafe.

    none
        suppresses all automatic opening of modules.  Compilation starts in
        an almost empty environment.  This option is not of general use.


    The default compilation mode is -O cautious.  See chapter 13 for a
    complete listing of the modules in the cautious and fast sets.

Unix: The following environment variables are also consulted:


      LANGWhen set, control which language is used to print the compiler
          messages (see the -lang command-line option).

      LC_CTYPE
          If set to iso_8859_1, accented characters (from the ISO Latin-1
          character set) in string and character literals are printed as is;
          otherwise, they are printed as decimal escape sequences (\ddd).


Chapter 5.   The toplevel system (camllight)                                49


5.2 Toplevel control functions

The standard library module toplevel, opened by default when the toplevel
system is launched, provides a number of functions that control the toplevel
behavior, load files in memory, and trace program execution.


value quit : unit -> unit

    Exit the toplevel loop and terminate the camllight command.

value include : string -> unit

    Read, compile and execute source phrases from the given file.  The .ml
    extension is automatically added to the file name, if not present.  This
    is textual inclusion:  phrases are processed just as if they were typed
    on standard input.  In particular, global identifiers defined by these
    phrases are entered in the module named top, not in a new module.

value load : string -> unit

    Load in memory the source code for a module implementation.  Read,
    compile and execute source phrases from the given file.  The .ml
    extension is automatically added if not present.  The load function
    behaves much like include, except that a new module is created, with name
    the base name of the source file name.  Global identifiers defined in the
    source file are entered in this module, instead of the top module as in
    the case of include.  For instance, assuming file foo.ml contains the
    single phrase


               let bar = 1;;


    executing load "foo" defines the identifier foo__bar with value 1.
    Caveat:  the loaded module is not automatically opened:  the identifier
    bar does not automatically complete to foo__bar.  To achieve this, you
    must execute the directive #open "foo" afterwards.

value compile : string -> unit

    Compile the source code for a module implementation or interface (.ml or
    .mli file).  Compilation proceeds as with the batch compiler, and
    produces the same results as camlc -c.  If the toplevel system is in
    debugging mode (option -g or function debug_mode below), the compilation
    is also performed in debugging mode, as when giving the -g option to the
    batch compiler.  The result of the compilation is left in files (.zo,
    .zi, .zix).  The compiled code is not loaded in memory.  Use load_object
    to load a .zo file produced by compile.

value load_object : string -> unit

    Load in memory the compiled bytecode contained in the given file.  The
    .zo extension is automatically added to the file name, if not present.
    The bytecode file has been produced either by the standalone compiler
    camlc or by the compile function.  Global identifiers defined in the file
    being loaded are entered in their own module, not in the top module, just
    as with the load function.


Chapter 5.   The toplevel system (camllight)                                50


value trace : string -> unit

    After the execution of trace "foo", all calls to the global function
    named foo will be ``traced''.  That is, the argument and the result are
    displayed for each call, as well as the exceptions escaping out of foo,
    either raised by foo itself, or raised by one of the functions called
    from foo.  If foo is a curried function, each argument is printed as it
    is passed to the function.  Only functions implemented in ML can be
    traced; system primitives such as string_length or user-supplied C
    functions cannot.

value untrace : string -> unit

    Executing untrace "foo" stops all tracing over the global function named
    foo.

value verbose_mode: bool -> unit

    verbose_mode true causes the compile function to print the inferred types
    and other information.  verbose_mode false reverts to the default silent
    behavior.

value install_printer : string -> unit

    install_printer "printername" registers the function named printername as
    a printer for objects whose types match its argument type.  That is, the
    toplevel loop will call printername when it has such an object to print.
    The printing function printername must use the format library module to
    produce its output, otherwise the output of printername will not be
    correctly located in the values printed by the toplevel loop.

value remove_printer : string -> unit

    remove_printer "printername" removes the function named printername from
    the table of toplevel printers.

value set_print_depth : int -> unit

    set_print_depth n limits the printing of values to a maximal depth of n.
    The parts of values whose depth exceeds n are printed as ... (ellipsis).

value set_print_length : int -> unit

    set_print_length n limits the number of value nodes printed to at most n.
    Remaining parts of values are printed as ... (ellipsis).

value debug_mode: bool -> unit

    Set whether extended module interfaces must be used debug_mode true or
    not debug_mode false.  Extended module interfaces are .zix files that
    describe the actual implementation of a module, including private types
    and variables.  They are generated when compiling with camlc -g, or with
    the compile function above when debug_mode is true.  When debug_mode is
    true, toplevel phrases can refer to private types and variables of
    modules, and private functions can be traced with trace.  Setting
    debug_mode true is equivalent to starting the toplevel with the -g
    option.


Chapter 5.  The toplevel system (camllight)                                 51


value cd : string -> unit

    Change the current working directory.

value directory : string -> unit

    Add the given directory to the search path for files.  Same behavior as
    the -I option or the #directory directive.



5.3 The toplevel and the module system

Toplevel phrases can refer to identifiers defined in modules other than the
top module with the same mechanisms as for separately compiled modules:
either by using qualified identifiers (modulename__localname), or by using
unqualified identifiers that are automatically completed by searching the list
of opened modules.  (See section 2.2.)  The modules opened at startup are
given in the documentation for the standard library.  Other modules can be
opened with the #open directive.
  However, before referencing a global variable from a module other than the
top module, a definition of that global variable must have been entered in
memory.  At start-up, the toplevel system contains the definitions for all the
identifiers in the standard library.  The definitions for user modules can be
entered with the load or load_object functions described above.  Referencing a
global variable for which no definition has been provided by load or
load_object results in the error ``Identifier foo__bar is referenced before
being defined''.  Since this is a tricky point, let us consider some examples.

1.  The library function sub_string is defined in module string.  This module
    is part of the standard library, and is one of the modules automatically
    opened at start-up.  Hence, both phrases


            sub_string "qwerty" 1 3;;
            string__sub_string "qwerty" 1 3;;


    are correct, without having to use #open, load, or load_object.

2.  The library function printf is defined in module printf.  This module is
    part of the standard library, but it is not automatically opened at
    start-up.  Hence, the phrase


            printf__printf "%s %s" "hello" "world";;


    is correctly executed, while


            printf "%s %s" "hello" "world";;


    causes the error ``Variable printf is unbound'', since none of the
    currently opened modules define a global with local name printf.
    However,


Chapter 5.   The toplevel system (camllight)                                52


            #open "printf";;
            printf "%s %s" "hello" "world";;


    executes correctly.

3.  Assume the file foo.ml resides in the current directory, and contains the
    single phrase


            let x = 1;;


    When the toplevel starts, references to x will cause the error ``Variable
    x is unbound''.  References to foo__x will cause the error ``Cannot find
    file foo.zi'', since the typechecker is attempting to load the compiled
    interface for module foo in order to find the type of x.  To load in
    memory the module foo, just do:


            load "foo";;


    Then, references to foo__x typecheck and evaluate correctly.  Since load
    does not open the module it loads, references to x will still fail with
    the error ``Variable x is unbound''.  You will have to do


            #open "foo";;


    explicitly, for x to complete automatically into foo__x.

4.  Finally, assume the file foo.ml above has been previously compiled with
    the camlc -c command.  The current directory therefore contains a
    compiled interface foo.zi, claiming that foo__x is a global variable with
    type int, and a compiled bytecode file foo.zo, defining foo__x to have
    the value 1.  When the toplevel starts, references to foo__x will cause
    the error ``foo__x is referenced before being defined''.  In contrast
    with case 3 above, the typechecker has succeeded in finding the compiled
    interface for module foo.  But execution cannot proceed, because no
    definition for foo__x has been entered in memory.  To do so, execute:


            load_object "foo";;


    This loads the file foo.zo in memory, therefore defining foo__x.  Then,
    references to foo__x evaluate correctly.  As in case 3 above, references
    to x still fail, because load_object does not open the module it loads.
    Again, you will have to do


            #open "foo";;


    explicitly, for x to complete automatically into foo__x.


Chapter 5.   The toplevel system (camllight)                                53


5.4 Common errors

This section describes and explains the most frequently encountered error
messages.

Cannot find file filename
    The named file could not be found in the current directory, nor in the
    directories of the search path.

    If filename has the format mod.zi, this means the current phrase
    references identifiers from module mod, but you have not yet compiled an
    interface for module mod.  Fix:  either load the file mod.ml, which will
    also create in memory the compiled interface for module mod; or use camlc
    to compile mod.mli or mod.ml, creating the compiled interface mod.zi,
    before you start the toplevel.

    If filename has the format mod.zo, this means you are trying to load with
    load_object a bytecode object file that does not exist yet.  Fix:
    compile mod.ml with camlc before you start the toplevel.  Or, use load
    instead of load_object to load the source code instead of a compiled
    object file.

    If filename has the format mod.ml, this means load or include could not
    find the specified source file.  Fix:  check the spelling of the file
    name, or write it if it does not exist.

mod__name is referenced before being defined
    You have neglected to load in memory an implementation for a module, with
    load or load_object.  This is explained in full detail in section 5.3
    above.

Corrupted compiled interface file filename
    See section 4.4.

Expression of type t1 cannot be used with type t2
    See section 4.4.


The type inferred for the value name, that is, t, contains type variables that cannot be generalized

    See section 4.4.


5.5 Building custom toplevel systems:  camlmktop

The camlmktop command builds Caml Light toplevels that contain user code
preloaded at start-up.

Mac:  This command is not available in the Macintosh version.

  The camlmktop command takes as argument a set of .zo files, and links them
with the object files that implement the Caml Light toplevel.  The typical use
is:

        camlmktop -o mytoplevel foo.zo bar.zo gee.zo

This creates the bytecode file mytoplevel, containing the Caml Light toplevel
system, plus the code from the three .zo files.  To run this toplevel, give it


Chapter 5.   The toplevel system (camllight)                                54


as argument to the camllight command:

        camllight mytoplevel

This starts a regular toplevel loop, except that the code from foo.zo, bar.zo
and gee.zo is already loaded in memory, just as if you had typed:

        load_object "foo";;
        load_object "bar";;
        load_object "gee";;

on entrance to the toplevel.  The modules foo, bar and gee are not opened,
though; you still have to do

        #open "foo";;

yourself, if this is what you wish.


5.6 Options

The following command-line options are recognized by camlmktop.

-ccopt option
    Pass the given option to the C compiler and linker, when linking in
    ``custom runtime'' mode.  See the corresponding option for camlc, in
    chapter 4.

-custom
    Link in ``custom runtime'' mode.  See the corresponding option for camlc,
    in chapter 4.

-g  Add debugging information to the toplevel file produced, which can then
    be debugged with camldebug (chapter 9).

-I directory
    Add the given directory to the list of directories searched for compiled
    object code files (.zo).

-o exec-file
    Specify the name of the toplevel file produced by the linker.


    Unix: The default is camltop.out.


    PC:   The default is camltop.exe.  The name must have .exe extension.











Chapter 6



The runtime system (camlrun)



The camlrun command executes bytecode files produced by the linking phase of
the camlc command.

Mac:  This command is a MPW tool, not a standalone Macintosh application.


6.1 Overview

The camlrun command comprises three main parts:  the bytecode interpreter,
that actually executes bytecode files; the memory allocator and garbage
collector; and a set of C functions that implement primitive operations such
as input/output.
  The usage for camlrun is:

        camlrun options bytecode-executable arg1 ... argn

The first non-option argument is taken to be the name of the file containing
the executable bytecode.  (That file is searched in the executable path as
well as in the current directory.)  The remaining arguments are passed to the
Caml Light program, in the string array sys__command_line.  Element 0 of this
array is the name of the bytecode executable file; elements 1 to n are the
remaining arguments arg1 to argn.
  As mentioned in chapter 4, in most cases, the bytecode executable files
produced by the camlc command are self-executable, and manage to launch the
camlrun command on themselves automatically.  That is, assuming caml.out is a
bytecode executable file,

        caml.out arg1 ... argn

works exactly as

        camlrun caml.out arg1 ... argn

Notice that it is not possible to pass options to camlrun when invoking
caml.out directly.


6.2 Options

The following command-line option is recognized by camlrun.

-V  Print out the camlrun version number.  Exit immediately without executing
    any byte-code file.



                                      55


Chapter 6.   The runtime system (camlrun)                                   56


The following environment variable are also consulted:

CAMLRUNPARAM
    Set the garbage collection parameters.  This variable must be a sequence
    of parameter specifications.  A parameter specification is an option
    letter followed by an = sign and a decimal number.  There are four
    options, corresponding to the four fields of the control record
    documented in section 14.5:


    s   (minor_heap_size) Size of the minor heap.

    i   (major_heap_increment) Minimum size increment for the major heap.

    o   (space_overhead) The major GC speed setting.

    v   (verbose) Whether to print GC messages or not.  0 is false; 1 is
        true; other values may give unexpected results.


    For example, under csh the command


            setenv CAMLRUNPARAM 's=250000 v=1'


    tells a subsequent camlrun to set its initial minor heap size to about
    1 megabyte (on a 32-bit machine) and to print its GC messages.

PATH
    List of directories searched to find the bytecode executable file.


6.3 Common errors

This section describes and explains the most frequently encountered error
messages.

filename: no such file or directory
    If filename is the name of a self-executable bytecode file, this means
    that either that file does not exist, or that it failed to run the
    camlrun bytecode interpreter on itself.  The second possibility indicates
    that Caml Light has not been properly installed on your system.

Cannot exec camlrun
    (When launching a self-executable bytecode file.)  The camlrun command
    could not be found in the executable path.  Check that Caml Light has
    been properly installed on your system.

Cannot find the bytecode file
    The file that camlrun is trying to execute (e.g.  the file given as first
    non-option argument to camlrun) either does not exist, or is not a valid
    executable bytecode file.

Truncated bytecode file
    The file that camlrun is trying to execute is not a valid executable
    bytecode file.  Probably it has been truncated or mangled since created.
    Erase and rebuild it.


Chapter 6.   The runtime system (camlrun)                                   57


Uncaught exception
    The program being executed contains a ``stray'' exception.  That is, it
    raises an exception at some point, and this exception is never caught.
    This causes immediate termination of the program.  If you wish to know
    which exception thus escapes, use the printexc__f function from the
    standard library (and don't forget to link your program with the -g
    option).

Out of memory
    The program being executed requires more memory than available.  Either
    the program builds too large data structures; or the program contains too
    many nested function calls, and the stack overflows.  In some cases, your
    program is perfectly correct, it just requires more memory than your
    machine provides.  (This happens quite frequently on small
    microcomputers, but is unlikely on Unix machines.)  In other cases, the
    ``out of memory'' message reveals an error in your program:
    non-terminating recursive function, allocation of an excessively large
    array or string, attempts to build an infinite list or other data
    structure, ...

    To help you diagnose this error, run your program with the -v option to
    camlrun.  If it displays lots of ``Growing stack...''  messages, this is
    probably a looping recursive function.  If it displays lots of ``Growing
    heap...''  messages, with the heap size growing slowly, this is probably
    an attempt to construct a data structure with too many (infinitely many?)
    cells.  If it displays few ``Growing heap...''  messages, but with a huge
    increment in the heap size, this is probably an attempt to build an
    excessively large array or string.











Chapter 7



The librarian (camllibr)



Mac:  This command is a MPW tool, not a standalone Macintosh application.


7.1 Overview

The camllibr program packs in one single file a set of bytecode object files
(.zo files).  The resulting file is also a bytecode object file and also has
the .zo extension.  It can be passed to the link phase of the camlc compiler
in replacement of the original set of bytecode object files.  That is, after
running

        camllibr -o library.zo mod1.zo mod2.zo mod3.zi mod4.zo

all calls to the linker with the form

        camlc ... library.zo ...

are exactly equivalent to

        camlc ... mod1.zo mod2.zo mod3.zi mod4.zo ...

  The typical use of camllibr is to build a library composed of several
modules:  this way, users of the library have only one .zo file to specify on
the command line to camlc, instead of a bunch of .zo files, one per module
contained in the library.
  The linking phase of camlc is clever enough to discard the code
corresponding to useless phrases:  in particular, definitions for global
variables that are never used after their definitions.  Hence, there is no
problem with putting many modules, even rarely used ones, into one single
library:  this will not result in bigger executables.
  The usage for camllibr is:

        camllibr options file1.zo ... filen.zo

where file1.zo through filen.zo are the object files to pack together.  The
order in which these file names are presented on the command line is relevant:
the compiled phrases contained in the library will be executed in that order.
(Remember that it is a link-time error to refer to a global variable that has
not yet been defined.)


7.2 Options

The following command-line options are recognized by camllibr.


                                      58


Chapter 7.  The librarian (camllibr)                                        59


-I directory
    Add the given directory to the list of directories searched for the input
    .zo files.  By default, the current directory is searched first, then the
    standard library directory.  Directories added with -I are searched after
    the current directory, but before the standard library directory.  When
    several directories are added with several -I options on the command
    line, these directories are searched from right to left (the rightmost
    directory is searched first, the leftmost is searched last).

-o library-name
    Specify the name of the output file.  The default is library.zo.

PC:   The following option is also supported:


      @response-file
          Process the files whose names are listed in file response-file,
          just as if these names appeared on the command line.  File names in
          response-file are separated by blanks (spaces, tabs, newlines).
          This option allows to overcome silly limitations on the length of
          the command line.



7.3 Turning code into a library

To develop a library, it is usually more convenient to split it into several
modules, that reflect the internal structure of the library.  From the
standpoint of the library users, however, it is preferable to view the library
as a single module, with only one interface file (.zi file) and one
implementation file (.zo file):  linking is easier, and there is no need to
put a bunch of #open directives, nor to have to remember the internal
structure of the library.
  The camllibr command allows having a single .zo file for the whole library.
Here is how the Caml Light module system can be used (some say ``abused'') to
have a single .zi file for the whole library.  To be more concrete, assume
that the library comprises three modules, windows, images and buttons.  The
idea is to add a fourth module, mylib, that re-exports the public parts of
windows, images and buttons.  The interface mylib.mli contains definitions for
those types that are public (exported with their definitions), declarations
for those types that are abstract (exported without their definitions), and
declarations for the functions that can be called from the user's code:

(* File mylib.mli *)
type 'a option = None | Some of 'a;;    (* a public type *)
type window and image and button;;      (* three abstract types *)
value new_window : int -> int -> window (* the public functions *)
  and draw_image : image -> window -> int -> int -> unit
  and ...

The implementation of the mylib module simply equates the abstract types and
the public functions to the corresponding types and functions in the modules
windows, images and buttons:

(* File mylib.ml *)
type window == windows__win
 and image  == images__pixmap
 and button == buttons__t;;


Chapter 7.   The librarian (camllibr)                                       60


let new_window = windows__open_window
and draw_image = images__draw
and ...

The files windows.ml, images.ml and buttons.ml can open the mylib module, to
access the public types defined in the interface mylib.mli, such as the option
type.  Of course, these modules must not reference the abstract types nor the
public functions, to avoid circularities.
  Types such as windows__win in the example above can be exported by the
windows module either abstractly or concretely (with their definition).
Often, it is necessary to export them concretely, because the other modules in
the library (images, buttons) need to build or destructure directly values of
that type.  Even if windows__win is exported concretely by the windows module,
that type will remain abstract to the library user, since it is abstracted by
the public interface mylib.
  The actual building of the library mylib proceeds as follows:

camlc -c mylib.mli              # create mylib.zi
camlc -c windows.mli windows.ml images.mli images.ml
camlc -c buttons.mli buttons.ml
camlc -c mylib.ml               # create mylib.zo
mv mylib.zo tmplib.zo           # renaming to avoid overwriting mylib.zo
camllibr -o mylib.zo windows.zo images.zo buttons.zo tmplib.zo

Then, copy mylib.zi and mylib.zo to a place accessible to the library users.
The other .zi and .zo files need not be copied.











Chapter 8



Lexer and parser generators (camllex, camlyacc)



This chapter describes two program generators:  camllex, that produces a
lexical analyzer from a set of regular expressions with associated semantic
actions, and camlyacc, that produces a parser from a grammar with associated
semantic actions.
  These program generators are very close to the well-known lex and yacc
commands that can be found in most C programming environments.  This chapter
assumes a working knowledge of lex and yacc:  while it describes the input
syntax for camllex and camlyacc and the main differences with lex and yacc, it
does not explain the basics of writing a lexer or parser description in lex
and yacc.  Readers unfamiliar with lex and yacc are referred to ``Compilers:
principles, techniques, and tools'' by Aho, Sethi and Ullman (Addison-Wesley,
1986), ``Compiler design in C'' by Holub (Prentice-Hall, 1990), or ``Lex &
Yacc'', by Mason and Brown (O'Reilly, 1990).
  Streams and stream matching, as described in section 3.1, provide an
alternative way to write lexers and parsers.  The stream matching technique is
more powerful than the combination of camllex and camlyacc in some cases
(higher-order parsers), but less powerful in other cases (precedences).
Choose whichever approach is more adapted to your parsing problem.

Mac:  These commands are MPW tool, not standalone Macintosh applications.


8.1 Overview of camllex

The camllex command produces a lexical analyzer from a set of regular
expressions with attached semantic actions, in the style of lex.  Assuming the
input file is lexer.mll, executing

        camllex lexer.mll

produces Caml Light code for a lexical analyzer in file lexer.ml.  This file
defines one lexing function per entry point in the lexer definition.  These
functions have the same names as the entry points.  Lexing functions take as
argument a lexer buffer, and return the semantic attribute of the
corresponding entry point.
  Lexer buffers are an abstract data type implemented in the standard library
module lexing.  The functions create_lexer_channel, create_lexer_string and
create_lexer from module lexing create lexer buffers that read from an input
channel, a character string, or any reading function, respectively.  (See the
description of module lexing in chapter 13.)
  When used in conjunction with a parser generated by camlyacc, the semantic
actions compute a value belonging to the type token defined by the generated
parsing module.  (See the description of camlyacc below.)


                                      61


Chapter 8.   Lexer and parser generators (camllex, camlyacc)                62


8.2 Syntax of lexer definitions

The format of lexer definitions is as follows:

{ header }
rule entrypoint =
  parse regexp { action }
      | ...
      | regexp { action }
and entrypoint =
  parse ...
and ...
;;

  Comments are delimited by (* and *), as in Caml Light.

8.2.1 Header

The header section is arbitrary Caml Light text enclosed in curly braces.  It
can be omitted.  If it is present, the enclosed text is copied as is at the
beginning of the output file.  Typically, the header section contains the
#open directives required by the actions, and possibly some auxiliary
functions used in the actions.

8.2.2 Entry points

The names of the entry points must be valid Caml Light identifiers.

8.2.3 Regular expressions

The regular expressions are in the style of lex, with a more Caml-like syntax.

` char `
    A character constant, with the same syntax as Caml Light character
    constants.  Match the denoted character.

_   Match any character.

eof Match the end of the lexer input.

" string "
    A string constant, with the same syntax as Caml Light string constants.
    Match the corresponding sequence of characters.

[ character-set ]
    Match any single character belonging to the given character set.  Valid
    character sets are:  single character constants ` c `; ranges of
    characters ` c1 ` - ` c2 ` (all characters between c1 and c2, inclusive);
    and the union of two or more character sets, denoted by concatenation.

[ ^ character-set ]
    Match any single character not belonging to the given character set.

regexp *
    (Repetition.)  Match the concatenation of zero or more strings that match
    regexp.


Chapter 8.   Lexer and parser generators (camllex, camlyacc)                63


regexp +
    (Strict repetition.)  Match the concatenation of one or more strings that
    match regexp.

regexp ?
    (Option.)  Match either the empty string, or a string matching regexp.

regexp1 | regexp2
    (Alternative.)  Match any string that matches either regexp1 or regexp2

regexp1 regexp2
    (Concatenation.)  Match the concatenation of two strings, the first
    matching regexp1, the second matching regexp2.

( regexp )
    Match the same strings as regexp.

  Concerning the precedences of operators, * and + have highest precedence,
followed by ?, then concatenation, then | (alternation).

8.2.4 Actions

The actions are arbitrary Caml Light expressions.  They are evaluated in a
context where the identifier lexbuf is bound to the current lexer buffer.
Some typical uses for lexbuf, in conjunction with the operations on lexer
buffers provided by the lexing standard library module, are listed below.

lexing__get_lexeme lexbuf
    Return the matched string.

lexing__get_lexeme_char lexbuf n
                th
    Return the n  character in the matched string.  The first character
    corresponds to n=0.

lexing__get_lexeme_start lexbuf
    Return the absolute position in the input text of the beginning of the
    matched string.  The first character read from the input text has
    position 0.

lexing__get_lexeme_end lexbuf
    Return the absolute position in the input text of the end of the matched
    string.  The first character read from the input text has position 0.

entrypoint lexbuf
    (Where entrypoint is the name of another entry point in the same lexer
    definition.)  Recursively call the lexer on the given entry point.
    Useful for lexing nested comments, for example.


8.3 Overview of camlyacc

The camlyacc command produces a parser from a context-free grammar
specification with attached semantic actions, in the style of yacc.  Assuming
the input file is grammar.mly, executing

        camlyacc options grammar.mly


Chapter 8.   Lexer and parser generators (camllex, camlyacc)                64


produces Caml Light code for a parser in the file grammar.ml, and its
interface in file grammar.mli.
  The generated module defines one parsing function per entry point in the
grammar.  These functions have the same names as the entry points.  Parsing
functions take as arguments a lexical analyzer (a function from lexer buffers
to tokens) and a lexer buffer, and return the semantic attribute of the
corresponding entry point.  Lexical analyzer functions are usually generated
from a lexer specification by the camllex program.  Lexer buffers are an
abstract data type implemented in the standard library module lexing.  Tokens
are values from the concrete type token, defined in the interface file
grammar.mli produced by camlyacc.


8.4 Syntax of grammar definitions

Grammar definitions have the following format:

%{
  header
%}
  declarations
%%
  rules
%%
  trailer

  Comments are enclosed between /* and */ (as in C) in the ``declarations''
and ``rules'' sections, and between (* and *) (as in Caml) in the ``header''
and ``trailer'' sections.

8.4.1 Header and trailer

The header and the trailer sections are Caml Light code that is copied as is
into file grammar.ml.  Both sections are optional.  The header goes at the
beginning of the output file; it usually contains #open directives required by
the semantic actions of the rules.  The trailer goes at the end of the output
file.

8.4.2 Declarations

Declarations are given one per line.  They all start with a % sign.

%token symbol...symbol
    Declare the given symbols as tokens (terminal symbols).  These symbols
    are added as constant constructors for the token concrete type.

%token < type > symbol...symbol
    Declare the given symbols as tokens with an attached attribute of the
    given type.  These symbols are added as constructors with arguments of
    the given type for the token concrete type.  The type part is an
    arbitrary Caml Light type expression, except that all type constructor
    names must be fully qualified (e.g.  modname__typename) for all types
    except standard built-in types, even if the proper #open directives (e.g.
    #open "modname") were given in the header section.  That's because the
    header is copied only to the .ml output file, but not to the .mli output
    file, while the type part of a %token declaration is copied to both.


Chapter 8.   Lexer and parser generators (camllex, camlyacc)                65


%start symbol...symbol
    Declare the given symbols as entry points for the grammar.  For each
    entry point, a parsing function with the same name is defined in the
    output module.  Non-terminals that are not declared as entry points have
    no such parsing function.  Start symbols must be given a type with the
    %type directive below.

%type < type > symbol...symbol
    Specify the type of the semantic attributes for the given symbols.  This
    is mandatory for start symbols only.  Other nonterminal symbols need not
    be given types by hand:  these types will be inferred when running the
    output files through the Caml Light compiler (unless the -s option is in
    effect).  The type part is an arbitrary Caml Light type expression,
    except that all type constructor names must be fully qualified (e.g.
    modname__typename) for all types except standard built-in types, even if
    the proper #open directives (e.g.  #open "modname") were given in the
    header section.  That's because the header is copied only to the .ml
    output file, but not to the .mli output file, while the type part of a
    %token declaration is copied to both.

%left symbol...symbol


%right symbol...symbol


%nonassoc symbol...symbol


    Associate precedences and associativities to the given symbols.  All
    symbols on the same line are given the same precedence.  They have higher
    precedence than symbols declared before in a %left, %right or %nonassoc
    line.  They have lower precedence than symbols declared after in a %left,
    %right or %nonassoc line.  The symbols are declared to associate to the
    left (%left), to the right (%right), or to be non-associative
    (%nonassoc).  The symbols are usually tokens.  They can also be dummy
    nonterminals, for use with the %prec directive inside the rules.

8.4.3 Rules

The syntax for rules is as usual:

nonterminal :
    symbol ... symbol { semantic-action }
  | ...
  | symbol ... symbol { semantic-action }
;

Rules can also contain the %prec symbol directive in the right-hand side part,
to override the default precedence and associativity of the rule with the
precedence and associativity of the given symbol.
  Semantic actions are arbitrary Caml Light expressions, that are evaluated to
produce the semantic attribute attached to the defined nonterminal.  The
semantic actions can access the semantic attributes of the symbols in the
right-hand side of the rule with the $ notation:  $1 is the attribute for the
first (leftmost) symbol, $2 is the attribute for the second symbol, etc.
  Actions occurring in the middle of rules are not supported.  Error recovery
is not implemented.


Chapter 8.  Lexer and parser generators (camllex, camlyacc)                 66


8.5 Options

The camlyacc command recognizes the following options:

-v  Generate a description of the parsing tables and a report on conflicts
    resulting from ambiguities in the grammar.  The description is put in
    file grammar.output.

-s  Generate a grammar.ml file with smaller phrases.  Semantic actions are
    presented in the grammar.ml output file as one large vector of functions.
    By default, this vector is built by a single phrase.  When the grammar is
    large, or contains complicated semantic actions, the resulting phrase may
    require large amounts of memory to be compiled by Caml Light.  With the
    -s option, the vector of actions is constructed incrementally, one phrase
    per action.  This lowers the memory requirements for the compiler, but it
    is no longer possible to infer the types of nonterminal symbols:
    typechecking is turned off on symbols that do not have a type specified
    by a %type directive.

-bprefix
    Name the output files prefix.ml, prefix.mli, prefix.output, instead of
    the default naming convention.


8.6 A complete example

The all-time favorite:  a desk calculator.  This program reads arithmetic
expressions on standard input, one per line, and prints their values.  Here is
the grammar definition:

        /* File parser.mly */
        %token <int> INT
        %token PLUS MINUS TIMES DIV
        %token LPAREN RPAREN
        %token EOL
        %left PLUS MINUS        /* lowest precedence */
        %left TIMES DIV         /* medium precedence */
        %nonassoc UMINUS        /* highest precedence */
        %start Main             /* the entry point */
        %type <int> Main
        %%
        Main:
            Expr EOL                { $1 }
        ;
        Expr:
            INT                     { $1 }
          | LPAREN Expr RPAREN      { $2 }
          | Expr PLUS Expr          { $1 + $3 }
          | Expr MINUS Expr         { $1 - $3 }
          | Expr TIMES Expr         { $1 * $3 }
          | Expr DIV Expr           { $1 / $3 }
          | MINUS Expr %prec UMINUS { - $2 }
        ;

Here is the definition for the corresponding lexer:

        (* File lexer.mll *)
        {


Chapter 8.   Lexer and parser generators (camllex, camlyacc)                67


        #open "parser";;        (* The type token is defined in parser.mli *)
        exception Eof;;
        }
        rule Token = parse
            [` ` `\t`]     { Token lexbuf }     (* skip blanks *)
          | [`\n` ]        { EOL }
          | [`0`-`9`]+     { INT(int_of_string (get_lexeme lexbuf)) }
          | `+`            { PLUS }
          | `-`            { MINUS }
          | `*`            { TIMES }
          | `/`            { DIV }
          | `(`            { LPAREN }
          | `)`            { RPAREN }
          | eof            { raise Eof }
        ;;

Here is the main program, that combines the parser with the lexer:

        (* File calc.ml *)
        try
          let lexbuf = lexing__create_lexer_channel std_in in
          while true do
            let result = parser__Main lexer__Token lexbuf in
              print_int result; print_newline(); flush std_out
          done
        with Eof ->
          ()
        ;;

To compile everything, execute:

        camllex lexer.mll       # generates lexer.ml
        camlyacc parser.mly     # generates parser.ml and parser.mli
        camlc -c parser.mli
        camlc -c lexer.ml
        camlc -c parser.ml
        camlc -c calc.ml
        camlc -o calc lexer.zo parser.zo calc.zo











Chapter 9



The debugger (camldebug)



This chapter describes the Caml Light source-level replay debugger camldebug.

Unix: The debugger resides in the directory contrib/debugger in the
      distribution.  It requires a Unix system that provides BSD sockets.

Mac:  The debugger is not available.

PC:   The debugger is not available.


9.1 Compiling for debugging

Before the debugger can be used, the program must be compiled and linked with
the -g option:  all .zo files that are part of the program should have been
created with camlc -g, and they must be linked together with camlc -g.
  Compiling with -g entails no penalty on the running time of programs:  .zo
files and bytecode executable files are bigger and take slightly longer to
produce, but the executable files run at exactly the same speed as if they had
been compiled without -g.  It is therefore perfectly acceptable to compile
always in -g mode.


9.2 Invocation

9.2.1 Starting the debugger

The Caml Light debugger is invoked by running the program camldebug with the
name of the bytecode executable file as argument:

        camldebug program

The following command-line options are recognized:

-stdlib directory
    Look for the standard library files in directory instead of in the
    default directory.

-s socket
    Use socket for communicating with the debugged program.  See the
    description of the command set socket (section 9.8.7) for the format of
    socket.

-c  count
    Set the maximum number of checkpoints to count.


                                      68


Chapter 9.   The debugger (camldebug)                                       69


-cd  directory
    Run the debugger program from the working directory directory, instead of
    the current directory.

-emacs
    Tell the debugger it is executing under Emacs.  (See section 11.4 for
    information on how to run the debugger under Emacs.)

9.2.2 Quitting the debugger

The command quit exits the debugger.  You can also exit the debugger by typing
an end-of-file character (usually ctrl-D).
  Typing an interrupt character (usually ctrl-C) will not exit the debugger,
but will terminate the action of any debugger command that is in progress and
return to the debugger command level.


9.3 Commands

A debugger command is a single line of input.  It starts with a command name,
which is followed by arguments depending on this name.  Examples:

        run
        goto 1000
        set arguments arg1 arg2

  A command name can be truncated as long as there is no ambiguity.  For
instance, go 1000 is understood as goto 1000, since there are no other
commands whose name starts with go.  For the most frequently used commands,
ambiguous abbreviations are allowed.  For instance, r stands for run even
though there are others commands starting with r.  You can test the validity
of an abbreviation using the help command.
  If the previous command has been successful, a blank line (typing just RET)
will repeat it.

9.3.1 Getting help

The Caml Light debugger has a simple on-line help system, which gives a brief
description of each command and variable.

help
    Print the list of commands.

help command
    Give help about the command command.

help set variable, help show variable
    Give help about the variable variable.  The list of all debugger
    variables can be obtained with help set.

help info topic
    Give help about topic.  Use help info to get a list of known topics.

9.3.2 Accessing the debugger state

set variable value
    Set the debugger variable variable to the value value.


Chapter 9.  The debugger (camldebug)                                        70


show variable
    Print the value of the debugger variable variable.

info subject
    Give information about the given subject.  For instance, info breakpoints
    will print the list of all breakpoints.


9.4 Executing a program

9.4.1 Events

Events are ``interesting'' locations in the source code, corresponding to the
beginning or end of evaluation of ``interesting'' sub-expressions.  Events are
the unit of single-stepping (stepping goes to the next or previous event
encountered in the program execution).  Also, breakpoints can only be set at
events.  Thus, events play the role of line numbers in debuggers for
conventional languages.
  During program execution, a counter is incremented at each event
encountered.  The value of this counter is referred as the current time.
Thanks to reverse execution, it is possible to jump back and forth to any time
of the execution.
  Here is where the debugger events (written <) are located in the source
code:

 -  Following a function application:


    (f arg)<


 -  After receiving an argument to a function:


    fun x< y>< z -> >< ...


    If a curried function is defined by pattern-matching with several cases,
    events corresponding to the passing of arguments are displayed on the
    first case of the function, because pattern-matching has not yet
    determined which case to select:


    fun pat1< pat2>< pat3 -> >< ...
      | ...


 -  On each case of a pattern-matching definition (function, match...with
    construct, try...with construct):


    function pat1 -> < expr1
           | ...
           | patN -> < exprN


 -  Between subexpressions of a sequence:


Chapter 9.   The debugger (camldebug)                                       71


    expr1; < expr2; >< ...; >< exprN


 -  In the two branches of a conditional expression:


    if cond then < expr1 else >< expr2


 -  At the beginning of each iteration of a loop:


    while cond do < body done
    for i = a to b do < body done


Exceptions:  A function application followed by a function return is replaced
by the compiler by a jump (tail-call optimization).  In this case, no event is
put after the function application.  Also, no event is put after a function
application when the function is a primitive function (written in C). Finally,
several events may correspond to the same location in the compiled program.
Then, the debugger cannot distinguish them, and selects one of the events to
associate with the given code location.  The event chosen is a ``function
application'' event if there is one at that location, or otherwise the event
which appears last in the source.  This heuristic generally picks the ``most
interesting'' event associated with the code location.

9.4.2 Starting the debugged program

The debugger starts executing the debugged program only when needed.  This
allows setting breapoints or assigning debugger variables before execution
starts.  There are several ways to start execution:

run Run the program until a breakpoint is hit, or the program terminates.

step 0
    Load the program and stop on the first event.

goto time
    Load the program and execute it until the given time.  Useful when you
    already know approximately at what time the problem appears.  Also useful
    to set breakpoints on function values that have not been computed at time
    0 (see section 9.5).

  The execution of a program is affected by certain information it receives
when the debugger starts it, such as the command-line arguments to the program
and its working directory.  The debugger provides commands to specify this
information (set arguments and cd).  These commands must be used before
program execution starts.  If you try to change the arguments or the working
directory after starting your program, the debugger will kill the program
(after asking for confirmation).

9.4.3 Running the program

The following commands execute the program forward or backward, starting at
the current time.  The execution will stop either when specified by the
command or when a breakpoint is encountered.


Chapter 9.   The debugger (camldebug)                                       72


run Execute the program forward from current time.  Stops at next breakpoint
    or when the program terminates.

reverse
    Execute the program backward from current time.  Mostly useful to go to
    the last breakpoint encountered before the current time.

step [count]
    Run the program and stop at the next event.  With an argument, do it
    count times.

backstep [count]
    Run the program backward and stop at the previous event.  With an
    argument, do it count times.

next [count]
    Run the program and stop at the next event, skipping over function calls.
    With an argument, do it count times.

finish
    Run the program until the current function returns.

9.4.4 Time travel

You can jump directly to a given time, without stopping on breakpoints, using
the goto command.
  As you move through the program, the debugger maintains an history of the
successive times you stop at.  The last command can be used to revisit these
times:  each last command moves one step back through the history.  That is
useful mainly to undo commands such as step and next.

goto time
    Jump to the given time.

last [count]
    Go back to the latest time recorded in the execution history.  With an
    argument, do it count times.

set history size
    Set the size of the execution history.

9.4.5 Killing the program

kill
    Kill the program being executed.  This command is mainly useful if you
    wish to recompile the program without leaving the debugger.


9.5 Breakpoints

A breakpoint causes the program to stop whenever a certain point in the
program is reached.  It can be set in several ways using the break command.
Breakpoints are assigned numbers when set, for further reference.

break
    Set a breakpoint at the current position in the program execution.  The
    current position must be on an event (i.e., neither at the beginning, nor
    at the end of the program).


Chapter 9.   The debugger (camldebug)                                       73


break function
    Set a breakpoint at the beginning of function.  This works only when the
    functional value of the identifier function has been computed and
    assigned to the identifier.  Hence this command cannot be used at the
    very beginning of the program execution, when all identifiers are still
    undefined.  Moreover, C functions are not recognized by the debugger.

break @ [module] line
    Set a breakpoint in module module (or in the current module if module is
    not given), at the first event of line line.

break @ [module] line column
    Set a breakpoint in module module (or in the current module if module is
    not given), at the event closest to line line, column column.

break @ [module] # character
    Set a breakpoint in module module at the event closest to character
    number character.

break address
    Set a breakpoint at the code address address.

delete [breakpoint-numbers]
    Delete the specified breakpoints.  Without argument, all breakpoints are
    deleted (after asking for confirmation).

info breakpoints
    Print the list of all breakpoints.


9.6 The call stack

Each time the program performs a function application, it saves the location
of the application (the return address) in a block of data called a stack
frame.  The frame also contains the local variables of the caller function.
All the frames are allocated in a region of memory called the call stack.  The
command backtrace (or bt) displays parts of the call stack.
  At any time, one of the stack frames is ``selected'' by the debugger;
several debugger commands refer implicitly to the selected frame.  In
particular, whenever you ask the debugger for the value of a local variable,
the value is found in the selected frame.  The commands frame, up and down
select whichever frame you are interested in.
  When the program stops, the debugger automatically selects the currently
executing frame and describes it briefly as the frame command does.

frame
    Describe the currently selected stack frame.

frame frame-number
    Select a stack frame by number and describe it.  The frame currently
    executing when the program stopped has number 0; its caller has number 1;
    and so on up the call stack.

backtrace [count], bt [count]
    Print the call stack.  This is useful to see which sequence of function
    calls led to the currently executing frame.  With a positive argument,
    print only the innermost count frames.  With a negative argument, print
    only the outermost -count frames.


Chapter 9.   The debugger (camldebug)                                       74


up [count]
    Select and display the stack frame just ``above'' the selected frame,
    that is, the frame that called the selected frame.  An argument says how
    many frames to go up.

down [count]
    Select and display the stack frame just ``below'' the selected frame,
    that is, the frame that was called by the selected frame.  An argument
    says how many frames to go down.


9.7 Examining variable values

The debugger can print the current value of a program variable (either a
global variable or a local variable relative to the selected stack frame).  It
can also print selected parts of a value by matching it against a pattern.
  Variable names can be specified either fully qualified
(module-name__var-name) or unqualified (var-name).  Unqualified names either
correspond to local variables, or are completed into fully qualified global
names by looking at a list of ``opened'' modules that define the same name
(see section 9.8.5 for how to open modules in the debugger.)  The completion
follows the same rules as in the Caml Light language (see section 2.2).

print variables
    Print the values of the given variables.

match variable pattern
    Match the value of the given variable against a pattern, and print the
    values bound to the identifiers in the pattern.

  The syntax of patterns for the match command extends the one for Caml Light
patterns:

            pattern  ::=  ident
                       |  _
                       |  ( pattern )
                       |  ncconstr pattern
                       |  pattern , pattern {, pattern}
                       |  { label = pattern {; label = pattern} }
                       |  [ ]
                       |  [ pattern {; pattern} ]
                       |  pattern :: pattern
                       |  # integer-literal pattern
                       |  > pattern

  The pattern ident, where ident is an identifier, matches any value, and
binds the identifier to this value.  The pattern # n pattern matches a list, a
vector or a tuple whose n-th element matches pattern.  The pattern > pattern
matches any constructed value whose argument matches pattern, regardless of
the constructor; it is a shortcut for skipping a constructor.
  Example:  assuming the value of a is Constr{x = [1;2;3;4]}, the command
match a > {x = # 2 k} prints k = 3.

set print_depth d
    Limit the printing of values to a maximal depth of d.

set print_length l
    Limit the printing of values to at most l nodes printed.


Chapter 9.   The debugger (camldebug)                                       75


9.8 Controlling the debugger

9.8.1 Setting the program name and arguments

set program file
    Set the program name to file.

set arguments arguments
    Give arguments as command-line arguments for the program.

  A shell is used to pass the arguments to the debugged program.  You can
therefore use wildcards, shell variables, and file redirections inside the
arguments.  To debug programs that read from standard input, it is recommended
to redirect their input from a file (using set arguments < input-file),
otherwise input to the program and input to the debugger are not properly
separated.

9.8.2 How programs are loaded

The loadingmode variable controls how the program is executed.

set loadingmode direct
    The program is run directly by the debugger.  This is the default mode.

set loadingmode runtime
    The debugger execute the Caml Light runtime camlrun on the program.
    Rarely useful; moreover it prevents the debugging of programs compiled in
    ``custom runtime'' mode.

set loadingmode manual
    The user starts manually the program, when asked by the debugger.  Allows
    remote debugging (see section 9.8.7).

9.8.3 Search path for files

The debugger searches for source files and compiled interface files in a list
of directories, the search path.  The search path initially contains the
current directory .  and the standard library directory.  The directory
command adds directories to the path.
  Whenever the search path is modified, the debugger will clear any
information it may have cached about the files.

directory directorynames
    Add the given directories to the search path.  These directories are
    added at the front, and will therefore be searched first.

directory
    Reset the search path.  This requires confirmation.

9.8.4 Working directory

Each time a program is started in the debugger, it inherits its working
directory from the current working directory of the debugger.  This working
directory is initially whatever it inherited from its parent process
(typically the shell), but you can specify a new working directory in the
debugger with the cd command or the -cd command-line option.


Chapter 9.   The debugger (camldebug)                                       76


cd directory
    Set the working directory for camldebug to directory.

pwd Print the working directory for camldebug.

9.8.5 Module management

Like the Caml Light compiler, the debugger maintains a list of opened modules
in order to resolves variable name ambiguities.  The opened modules also
affect the printing of values:  whether fully qualified names or short names
are used for constructors and record labels.
  When a program is executed, the debugger automatically opens the modules of
the standard library it uses.

open modules
    Open the given modules.

close modules
    Close the given modules.

info modules
    List the modules used by the program, and the open modules.

9.8.6 Turning reverse execution on and off

In some cases, you may want to turn reverse execution off.  This speeds up the
program execution, and is also sometimes useful for interactive programs.
  Normally, the debugger takes checkpoints of the program state from time to
time.  That is, it makes a copy of the current state of the program (using the
Unix system call fork).  If the variable checkpoints is set to off, the
debugger will not take any checkpoints.

set checkpoints on/off
    Select whether the debugger makes checkpoints or not.

9.8.7 Communication between the debugger and the program

The debugger communicate with the program being debugged through a Unix
socket.  You may need to change the socket name, for example if you need to
run the debugger on a machine and your program on another.

set socket socket
    Use socket for communication with the program.  socket can be either a
    file name, or an Internet port specification host:port, where host is a
    host name or an Internet address in dot notation, and port is a port
    number on the host.

  On the debugged program side, the socket name is passed either by the -D
command line option to camlrun, or through the CAML_DEBUG_SOCKET environment
variable.

9.8.8 Fine-tuning the debugger

Several variables enables to fine-tune the debugger.  Reasonable defaults are
provided, and you should normally not have to change them.


Chapter 9.   The debugger (camldebug)                                       77


set processcount count
    Set the maximum number of checkpoints to count.  More checkpoints
    facilitate going far back in time, but use more memory and create more
    Unix processes.

  As checkpointing is quite expensive, it must not be done too often.  On the
other hand, backward execution is faster when checkpoints are taken more
often.  In particular, backward single-stepping is more responsive when many
checkpoints have been taken just before the current time.  To fine-tune the
checkpointing strategy, the debugger does not take checkpoints at the same
frequency for long displacements (e.g.  run) and small ones (e.g.  step).  The
two variables bigstep and smallstep contain the number of events between two
checkpoints in each case.

set bigstep count
    Set the number of events between two checkpoints for long displacements.

set smallstep count
    Set the number of events between two checkpoints for small displacements.

  The following commands display information on checkpoints and events:

info checkpoints
    Print a list of checkpoints.

info events [module]
    Print the list of events in the given module (the current module, by
    default).


9.9 Miscellaneous commands

list [module] [beginning] [end]
    List the source of module module, from line number beginning to line
    number end.  By default, 20 lines of the current module are displayed,
    starting 10 lines before the current position.

source filename
    Read debugger commands from the script filename.











Chapter 10



Profiling (camlpro)



This chapter describes how the execution of Caml Light programs can be
profiled, by recording how many times functions are called, branches of
conditionals are taken, ...

Mac:  This command is not available.

PC:   This command is not available.


10.1 Compiling for profiling

Before profiling an execution, the program must be compiled in profiling mode,
using the -p option to the batch compiler camlc (see chapter 4).  When
compiling modules separately, the -p option must be given both when compiling
the modules (production of .zo files) and when linking them together.
  The amount of profiling information can be controlled by adding one or
several letters after the -p option, indicating which parts of the program
should be profiled:

a   all options

f   function calls :  a count point is set at the beginning of function
    bodies

i   if ...then ...else ...  :  count points are set in both then branch and
    else branch

l   while, for loops:  a count point is set at the beginning of the loop body

m   match branches:  a count point is set at the beginning of the body of
    each branch

t   try ...with ...  branches:  a count point is set at the beginning of the
    body of each branch

  For instance, compiling with -pfilm profiles function calls, if...then
...else..., loops and pattern matching.
  The -p option without additional letters defaults to -pfm, meaning that only
function calls and pattern matching are profiled.






                                      78


Chapter 10.   Profiling (camlpro)                                           79


10.2 Profiling an execution

Running a bytecode executable file that has been compiled and linked with -p
records the execution counts for the specified parts of the program and saves
them in a file called camlpro.dump in the current directory.
  More precisely, the dump file camlpro.dump is written when the io__exit
function is called.  The linker, called with the -p option, adds io__exit 0 as
the last phrase of the bytecode executable, in case the original program never
calls io__exit.  However, if the program terminates with an uncaught
exception, the dump file will not be produced.
  If a compatible dump file already exists in the current directory, then the
profiling information is accumulated in this dump file.  This allows, for
instance, the profiling of several executions of a program on different
inputs.


10.3 Printing profiling information

The camlpro command produces a source listing of the program modules where
execution counts have been inserted as comments.  For instance,

        camlpro foo.ml

prints the source code for the foo module, with comments indicating how many
times the functions in this module have been called.  Naturally, this
information is accurate only if the source file has not been modified since
the profiling execution took place.
  The following options are recognized by camlpro:

compiler options -stdlib, -I, -include, -O, -open, -i, -lang
    See chapter 4 for the detailed usage.

-f dumpfile
    Specifies an alternate dump file of profiling information

-F string
    Specifies an additional string to be output with profiling information.
    By default, camlpro will annotate progams with comments of the form (* n
    *) where n is the counter value for a profiling point.  With option -F s,
    the annotation will be (* sn *).

  An additional argument specifies the output file.  For instance

camlpro -f ../test/camlpro.dump foo.ml foo_profiled.ml

will save the annotated program in file foo_profiled.ml.  Otherwise, the
annotated program is written on the standard output.


10.4 Known bugs

The following situation (file x.ml)

let a = 1;;
x__a ;;

will break the profiler.  More precisely, one should avoid to refer to symbols
of the current module with the qualified symbol syntax.











Chapter 11



Using Caml Light under Emacs



This chapter describes how Caml Light can be used in conjunction with Gnu
Emacs version 19 (version 18 is also partially supported).

Unix: The Emacs Lisp files implementing the Caml/Emacs interface are in
      contrib/camlmode in the distribution.

Mac:  The Caml/Emacs interface is not available.

PC:   The Caml/Emacs interface is not available.


11.1 Updating your .emacs

The following initializations must be added to your .emacs file:

(setq auto-mode-alist (cons '("\\.ml[iylp]?" . caml-mode) auto-mode-alist))
(autoload 'caml-mode "caml" "Major mode for editing Caml code." t)
(autoload 'run-caml "inf-caml" "Run an inferior Caml process." t)
(autoload 'camldebug "camldebug" "Run the Caml debugger." t)


11.2 The caml editing mode

The caml-mode function is a major editing mode for Caml source files.  It
provides the correct syntax tables, comment syntax, ... for the Caml language.
An extremely crude indentation facility is provided, as well as a slightly
enhanced next-error command (to display the location of a compilation error).
The following key bindings are performed:

TAB (function caml-indent-command)
    At the beginning of a line, indent that line like the line above.
    Successive TABs increase the indentation level by 2 spaces (by default;
    can be set with the caml-mode-indentation variable).

M-TAB (function caml-unindent-command)
    Decrease the indentation level of the current phrase.

C-x ` (function caml-next-error)
    Display the next compilation error, just as next-error does.  In
    addition, it puts the point and the mark around the exact location of the
    error (the subexpression that caused the error).  Under Emacs 19, that
    subexpression is also highlighted.




                                      80


Chapter 11.   Using Caml Light under Emacs                                  81


M-C-h (function caml-mark-phrase)
    Mark the Caml phrase that contains the point:  the point is put at the
    beginning of the phrase and the mark at the end.  Phrases are delimited
    by ;; (the final double-semicolon).  This function does not properly
    ignore ;; inside string literals or comments.

C-x SPC
    When the Caml debugger is running as an inferior process (section 11.4
    below), set a breakpoint at the current position of the point.

M-C-x or C-c C-e (function caml-eval-phrase)
    When a Caml toplevel is running as an inferior process (section 11.3
    below), send it the the Caml phrase that contains the point.  The phrase
    will then be evaluated by the inferior toplevel as usual.  The phrase is
    delimited by ;; as described for the caml-mark-phrase command.

C-c C-r (function caml-eval-region)
    Send the region to a Caml toplevel running in an inferior process.


11.3 Running the toplevel as an inferior process

M-x run-caml starts a Caml toplevel with input and output in an Emacs buffer
named *inferior-caml*.  This gives you the full power of Emacs to edit the
input to the Caml toplevel.  An history of input lines is maintained, as in
Shell mode.  This includes the following commands (see the function
comint-mode for a complete description):

RET Send the current line to the toplevel.

M-n and M-p
    Move to the next or previous line in the history.

M-r and M-s
    Regexp search in the history.

C-c C-c
    Send a break (interrupt signal) to the Caml toplevel.

  Phrases can also be sent to the Caml toplevel for evaluation from any buffer
in Caml mode, using M-C-x, C-c C-e or C-c C-r.


11.4 Running the debugger as an inferior process

The Caml debugger is started by the command M-x camldebug, with argument the
name of the executable file progname to debug.  Communication with the
debugger takes place in an Emacs buffer named *camldebug-progname*.  The
editing and history facilities of Shell mode are available for interacting
with the debugger.
  In addition, Emacs displays the source files containing the current event
(the current position in the program execution) and highlights the location of
the event.  This display is updated synchronously with the debugger action.
  The following bindings for the most common debugger commands are available
in the *camldebug-progname* buffer (see section 9.3 for a full explanation of
the commands):

M-r run command:  execute the program forward.


Chapter 11.   Using Caml Light under Emacs                                  82


M-s step command:  execute the program one step forward.

M-b back command:  execute the program one step backward.

M-l last command:  go back one step in the command history.

C-c >
    down command:  select the stack frame below the current frame.

C-c <
    up command:  select the stack frame above the current frame.

C-c C-f
    finish command:  run till the current function returns.

  In a buffer in Caml editing mode, C-x SPC sets a breakpoint at the current
position of the point.











Chapter 12



Interfacing C with Caml Light



This chapter describes how user-defined primitives, written in C, can be added
to the Caml Light runtime system and called from Caml Light code.


12.1 Overview and compilation information

12.1.1 Declaring primitives

User primitives are declared in a module interface (a .mli file), in the same
way as a regular ML value, except that the declaration is followed by the =
sign, the function arity (number of arguments), and the name of the
corresponding C function.  For instance, here is how the input primitive is
declared in the interface for the standard library module io:

        value input : in_channel -> string -> int -> int -> int
                    = 4 "input"

Primitives with several arguments are always curried.  The C function does not
necessarily have the same name as the ML function.
  Values thus declared primitive in a module interface must not be implemented
in the module implementation (the .ml file).  They can be used inside the
module implementation.

12.1.2 Implementing primitives

User primitives with arity n<5 are implemented by C functions that take n
arguments of type value, and return a result of type value.  The type value is
the type of the representations for Caml Light values.  It encodes objects of
several base types (integers, floating-point numbers, strings, ...), as well
as Caml Light data structures.  The type value and the associated conversion
functions and macros are described in details below.  For instance, here is
the declaration for the C function implementing the input primitive:

        value input(channel, buffer, offset, length)
                value channel, buffer, offset, length;
        {
         ...
        }

  When the primitive function is applied in a Caml Light program, the C
function is called with the values of the expressions to which the primitive
is applied as arguments.  The value returned by the function is passed back to
the Caml Light program as the result of the function application.


                                      83


Chapter 12.   Interfacing C with Caml Light                                 84


  User primitives with arity greater than 5 are implemented by C functions
that receive two arguments:  a pointer to an array of Caml Light values (the
values for the arguments), and an integer which is the number of arguments
provided:

        value prim_with_lots_of_args(argv, argn)
                value * argv;
                int argn;
        {
          ... argv[0] ...;              /* The first argument */
          ... argv[6] ...;              /* The seventh argument */
        }

  Implementing a user primitive is actually two separate tasks:  on the one
hand, decoding the arguments to extract C values from the given Caml Light
values, and encoding the return value as a Caml Light value; on the other
hand, actually computing the result from the arguments.  Except for very
simple primitives, it is often preferable to have two distinct C functions to
implement these two tasks.  The first function actually implements the
primitive, taking native C values as arguments and returning a native C value.
The second function, often called the ``stub code'', is a simple wrapper
around the first function that converts its arguments from Caml Light values
to C values, call the first function, and convert the returned C value to Caml
Light value.  For instance, here is the stub code for the input primitive:

        value input(channel, buffer, offset, length)
                value channel, buffer, offset, length;
        {
          return Val_long(getblock((struct channel *) channel,
                                   &Byte(buffer, Long_val(offset)),
                                   Long_val(length)));
        }

(Here, Val_long, Long_val and so on are conversion macros for the type value,
that will be described later.)  The hard work is performed by the function
getblock, which is declared as:

        long getblock(channel, p, n)
             struct channel * channel;
             char * p;
             long n;
        {
          ...
        }

  To write C code that operates on Caml Light values, the following include
files are provided:
   ------------------------------------------------------------------------
   |Include file |Provides                                                |
   ------------------------------------------------------------------------
   |mlvalues.h   |definition of the value type, and conversion macros     |
   |alloc.h      |allocation functions  (to create structured  Caml Light |
   |             |objects)                                                |
   |memory.h     |miscellaneous  memory-related functions  (for  in-place |
   |             |modification of structures, etc).                       |
   ------------------------------------------------------------------------

These files reside in the Caml Light standard library directory (usually
/usr/local/lib/caml-light).


Chapter 12.   Interfacing C with Caml Light                                 85


12.1.3 Linking C code with Caml Light code

The Caml Light runtime system comprises three main parts:  the bytecode
interpreter, the memory manager, and a set of C functions that implement the
primitive operations.  Some bytecode instructions are provided to call these C
functions, designated by their offset in a table of functions (the table of
primitives).
  In the default mode, the Caml Light linker produces bytecode for the
standard runtime system, with a standard set of primitives.  References to
primitives that are not in this standard set result in the ``unavailable C
primitive'' error.
  In the ``custom runtime'' mode, the Caml Light linker scans the bytecode
object files (.zo files) and determines the set of required primitives.  Then,
it builds a suitable runtime system, by calling the native code linker with:

 -  the table of the required primitives

 -  a library that provides the bytecode interpreter, the memory manager, and
    the standard primitives

 -  libraries and object code files (.o files) mentioned on the command line
    for the Caml Light linker, that provide implementations for the user's
    primitives.

This builds a runtime system with the required primitives.  The Caml Light
linker generates bytecode for this custom runtime system.  The bytecode is
appended to the end of the custom runtime system, so that it will be
automatically executed when the output file (custom runtime + bytecode) is
launched.
  To link in ``custom runtime'' mode, execute the camlc command with:

 -  the -custom option

 -  the names of the desired Caml Light object files (.zo files)

 -  the names of the C object files and libraries (.o and .a files) that
    implement the required primitives.  (Libraries can also be specified with
    the usual -l syntax.)


12.2 The value type

All Caml Light objects are represented by the C type value, defined in the
include file mlvalues.h, along with macros to manipulate values of that type.
An object of type value is either:

 -  an unboxed integer

 -  a pointer to a block inside the heap (such as the blocks allocated
    through one of the alloc_* functions below)

 -  a pointer to an object outside the heap (e.g., a pointer to a block
    allocated by malloc, or to a C variable).

12.2.1 Integer values

Integer values encode 31-bit signed integers.  They are unboxed (unallocated).


Chapter 12.   Interfacing C with Caml Light                                 86


12.2.2 Blocks

Blocks in the heap are garbage-collected, and therefore have strict structure
constraints.  Each block includes a header containing the size of the block
(in words), and the tag of the block.  The tag governs how the contents of the
blocks are structured.  A tag lower than No_scan_tag indicates a structured
block, containing well-formed values, which is recursively traversed by the
garbage collector.  A tag greater than or equal to No_scan_tag indicates a raw
block, whose contents are not scanned by the garbage collector.  For the
benefits of ad-hoc polymorphic primitives such as equality and structured
input-output, structured and raw blocks are further classified according to
their tags as follows:
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------
    |Tag                 |Contents of the block                          |
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------
    |0 to No_scan_tag- 1 |A  structured block  (an array  of Caml  Light |
    |                    |objects).  Each field is a value.              |
    |Closure_tag         |A  closure  representing a  functional  value. |
    |                    |The  first  word  is  a  pointer  to  a  piece |
    |                    |of  bytecode,  the  second  word  is  a  value |
    |                    |containing the environment.                    |
    |String_tag          |A character string.                            |
    |Double_tag          |A double-precision floating-point number.      |
    |Abstract_tag        |A block representing an abstract datatype.     |
    |Final_tag           |A block representing an abstract datatype with |
    |                    |a ``finalization'' function, to be called when |
    |                    |the block is deallocated.                      |
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------

12.2.3 Pointers to outside the heap

Any pointer to outside the heap can be safely cast to and from the type value.
This includes pointers returned by malloc, and pointers to C variables
obtained with the & operator.


12.3 Representation of Caml Light data types

This section describes how Caml Light data types are encoded in the value
type.

12.3.1 Atomic types
              -------------------------------------------------
              |Caml type |Encoding                             |
              -------------------------------------------------
              |int       |Unboxed integer values.              |
              |char      |Unboxed integer values (ASCII code). |
              |float     |Blocks with tag Double_tag.          |
              |string    |Blocks with tag String_tag.          |
              -------------------------------------------------

12.3.2 Product types

Tuples and arrays are represented by pointers to blocks, with tag 0.
  Records are also represented by zero-tagged blocks.  The ordering of labels
in the record type declaration determines the layout of the record fields:
the value associated to the label declared first is stored in field 0 of the
block, the value associated to the label declared next goes in field 1, and so
on.


Chapter 12.   Interfacing C with Caml Light                                 87


12.3.3 Concrete types

Constructed terms are represented by blocks whose tag encode the constructor.
The constructors for a given concrete type are numbered from 0 to the number
of constructors minus one, following the order in which they appear in the
concrete type declaration.  Constant constructors are represented by
zero-sized blocks (atoms), tagged with the constructor number.  Non-constant
constructors declared with a n-tuple as argument are represented by a block of
size n, tagged with the constructor number; the n fields contain the
components of its tuple argument.  Other non-constant constructors are
represented by a block of size 1, tagged with the constructor number; the
field 0 contains the value of the constructor argument.  Example:
   ------------------------------------------------------------------------
   |Constructed term|Representation                                       |
   ------------------------------------------------------------------------
   |()              |Size = 0, tag = 0                                    |
   |false           |Size = 0, tag = 0                                    |
   |true            |Size = 0, tag = 1                                    |
   |[]              |Size = 0, tag = 0                                    |
   |h::t            |Size = 2, tag = 1, first field = h, second field = t |
   ------------------------------------------------------------------------

12.4 Operations on values

12.4.1 Kind tests

 -  Is_int(v) is true if value v is an immediate integer, false otherwise

 -  Is_block(v) is true if value v is a pointer to a block, and false if it
    is an immediate integer.

12.4.2 Operations on integers

 -  Val_long(l) returns the value encoding the long int l

 -  Long_val(v) returns the long int encoded in value v

 -  Val_int(i) returns the value encoding the int i

 -  Int_val(v) returns the int encoded in value v

12.4.3 Accessing blocks

 -  Wosize_val(v) returns the size of value v, in words, excluding the
    header.

 -  Tag_val(v) returns the tag of value v.

                                                   th
 -  Field(v,n) returns the value contained in the n   field of the structured
    block v.  Fields are numbered from 0 to Wosize_val(v)-1.

 -  Code_val(v) returns the code part of the closure v.

 -  Env_val(v) returns the environment part of the closure v.

 -  string_length(v) returns the length (number of characters) of the string
    v.


Chapter 12.   Interfacing C with Caml Light                                 88


                           th
 -  Byte(v,n) returns the n   character of the string v, with type char.
    Characters are numbered from 0 to string_length(v)-1.

                             th
 -  Byte_u(v,n) returns the n   character of the string v, with type unsigned
    char.  Characters are numbered from 0 to string_length(v)-1.

 -  String_val(v) returns a pointer to the first byte of the string v, with
    type char *.  This pointer is a valid C string:  there is a null
    character after the last character in the string.  However, Caml Light
    strings can contain embedded null characters, that will confuse the usual
    C functions over strings.

 -  Double_val(v) returns the floating-point number contained in value v,
    with type double.

The expressions Field(v,n), Code_val(v), Env_val(v), Byte(v,n), Byte_u(v,n)
and Double_val(v) are valid l-values.  Hence, they can be assigned to,
resulting in an in-place modification of value v.  Assigning directly to
Field(v,n) must be done with care to avoid confusing the garbage collector
(see below).

12.4.4 Allocating blocks

From the standpoint of the allocation functions, blocks are divided according
to their size as zero-sized blocks, small blocks (with size less than or equal
to Max_young_wosize), and large blocks (with size greater than to
Max_young_wosize).  The constant Max_young_wosize is declared in the include
file mlvalues.h.  It is guaranteed to be at least 64 (words), so that any
block with constant size less than or equal to 64 can be assumed to be small.
For blocks whose size is computed at run-time, the size must be compared
against Max_young_wosize to determine the correct allocation procedure.

 -  Atom(t) returns an ``atom'' (zero-sized block) with tag t.  Zero-sized
    blocks are preallocated outside of the heap.  It is incorrect to try and
    allocate a zero-sized block using the functions below.  For instance,
    Atom(0) represents (), false and []; Atom(1) represents true.  (As a
    convenience, mlvalues.h defines the macros Val_unit, Val_false and
    Val_true.)

 -  alloc(n,t) returns a fresh small block of size n< Max_young_wosize words,
    with tag t.  If this block is a structured block (i.e.  if
    t<No_scan_tag), then the fields of the block (initially containing
    garbage) must be initialized with legal values (using direct assignment
    to the fields of the block) before the next allocation.

 -  alloc_tuple(n) returns a fresh small block of size n<Max_young_wosize
    words, with tag 0.  The fields of this block must be filled with legal
    values before the next allocation or modification.

 -  alloc_shr(n,t) returns a fresh block of size n, with tag t.  The size of
    the block can be greater than Max_young_wosize.  (It can also be smaller,
    but in this case it is more efficient to call alloc instead of
    alloc_shr.)  If this block is a structured block (i.e.  if
    t<No_scan_tag), then the fields of the block (initially containing
    garbage) must be initialized with legal values (using the initialize
    function described below) before the next allocation.


Chapter 12.   Interfacing C with Caml Light                                 89


 -  alloc_string(n) returns a string value of length n characters.  The
    string initially contains garbage.

 -  copy_string(s) returns a string value containing a copy of the
    null-terminated C string s (a char *).

 -  copy_double(d) returns a floating-point value initialized with the double
    d.

 -  alloc_array(f,a) allocates an array of values, calling function f over
    each element of the input array a to transform it into a value.  The
    array a is an array of pointers terminated by the null pointer.  The
    function f receives each pointer as argument, and returns a value.  The
    zero-tagged block returned by alloc_array(f,a) is filled with the values
    returned by the successive calls to f.

 -  copy_string_array(p) allocates an array of strings, copied from the
    pointer to a string array p (a char **).

12.4.5 Raising exceptions

C functions cannot raise arbitrary exceptions.  However, two functions are
provided to raise two standard exceptions:

 -  failwith(s), where s is a null-terminated C string (with type char *),
    raises exception Failure with argument s.

 -  invalid_argument(s), where s is a null-terminated C string (with type
    char *), raises exception Invalid_argument with argument s.


12.5 Living in harmony with the garbage collector

Unused blocks in the heap are automatically reclaimed by the garbage
collector.  This requires some cooperation from C code that manipulates
heap-allocated blocks.

Rule 1 After a structured block (a block with tag less than No_scan_tag) is
allocated, all fields of this block must be filled with well-formed values
before the next allocation operation.  If the block has been allocated with
alloc or alloc_tuple, filling is performed by direct assignment to the fields
of the block:

        Field(v, n) = vn;

If the block has been allocated with alloc_shr, filling is performed through
the initialize function:

        initialize(&Field(v, n), vn);

  The next allocation can trigger a garbage collection.  The garbage collector
assumes that all structured blocks contain well-formed values.  Newly created
blocks contain random data, which generally do not represent well-formed
values.
  If you really need to allocate before the fields can receive their final
value, first initialize with a constant value (e.g.  Val_long(0)), then
allocate, then modify the fields with the correct value (see rule 3).


Chapter 12.   Interfacing C with Caml Light                                 90


Rule 2 Local variables containing values must be registered with the garbage
collector (using the Push_roots and Pop_roots macros), if they are to survive
a call to an allocation function.

  Registration is performed with the Push_roots and Pop_roots macros.
Push_roots(r,n) declares an array r of n values and registers them with the
garbage collector.  The values contained in r[0] to r[n-1] are treated like
roots by the garbage collector.  A root value has the following properties:
if it points to a heap-allocated block, this block (and its contents) will not
be reclaimed; moreover, if this block is relocated by the garbage collector,
the root value is updated to point to the new location for the block.
Push_roots(r,n) must occur in a C block exactly between the last local
variable declaration and the first statement in the block.  To un-register the
roots, Pop_roots() must be called before the C block containing
Push_roots(r,n) is exited.  (Roots are automatically un-registered if a Caml
exception is raised.)

Rule 3 Direct assignment to a field of a block, as in

        Field(v, n) = w;

is safe only if v is a block newly allocated by alloc or alloc_tuple; that is,
if no allocation took place between the allocation of v and the assignment to
the field.  In all other cases, never assign directly.  If the block has just
been allocated by alloc_shr, use initialize to assign a value to a field for
the first time:

        initialize(&Field(v, n), w);

Otherwise, you are updating a field that previously contained a well-formed
value; then, call the modify function:

        modify(&Field(v, n), w);

  To illustrate the rules above, here is a C function that builds and returns
a list containing the two integers given as parameters:

value alloc_list_int(i1, i2)
        int i1, i2;
{
  value result;
  Push_roots(r, 1);
  r[0] = alloc(2, 1);                     /* Allocate a cons cell */
  Field(r[0], 0) = Val_int(i2);           /* car = the integer i2 */
  Field(r[0], 1) = Atom(0);               /* cdr = the empty list [] */
  result = alloc(2, 1);                   /* Allocate the other cons cell */
  Field(result, 0) = Val_int(i1);         /* car = the integer i1 */
  Field(result, 1) = r[0];                /* cdr = the first cons cell */
  Pop_roots();
  return result;
}

The ``cons'' cell allocated first needs to survive the allocation of the other
cons cell; hence, the value returned by the first call to alloc must be stored
in a registered root.  The value returned by the second call to alloc can
reside in the un-registered local variable result, since we won't do any
further allocation in this function.


Chapter 12.  Interfacing C with Caml Light                                  91


  In the example above, the list is built bottom-up.  Here is an alternate
way, that proceeds top-down.  It is less efficient, but illustrates the use of
modify.

value alloc_list_int(i1, i2)
        int i1, i2;
{
  value tail;
  Push_roots(r, 1);
  r[0] = alloc(2, 1);                     /* Allocate a cons cell */
  Field(r[0], 0) = Val_int(i1);           /* car = the integer i1 */
  Field(r[0], 1) = Val_int(0);            /* A dummy value
  tail = alloc(2, 1);                     /* Allocate the other cons cell */
  Field(tail, 0) = Val_int(i2);           /* car = the integer i2 */
  Field(tail, 1) = Atom(0);               /* cdr = the empty list [] */
  modify(&Field(r[0], 1), tail);          /* cdr of the result = tail */
  Pop_roots();
  return r[0];
}

It would be incorrect to perform Field(r[0], 1) = tail directly, because the
allocation of tail has taken place since r[0] was allocated.


12.6 A complete example

This section outlines how the functions from the Unix curses library can be
made available to Caml Light programs.  First of all, here is the interface
curses.mli that declares the curses primitives and data types:

type window;;                   (* The type "window" remains abstract *)
value initscr: unit -> window = 1 "curses_initscr"
  and endwin: unit -> unit = 1 "curses_endwin"
  and refresh: unit -> unit = 1 "curses_refresh"
  and wrefresh : window -> unit = 1 "curses_wrefresh"
  and newwin: int -> int -> int -> int -> window = 4 "curses_newwin"
  and mvwin: window -> int -> int -> unit = 3 "curses_mvwin"
  and addch: char -> unit = 1 "curses_addch"
  and mvwaddch: window -> int -> int -> char -> unit = 4 "curses_mvwaddch"
  and addstr: string -> unit = 1 "curses_addstr"
  and mvwaddstr: window -> int -> int -> string -> unit = 4 "curses_mvwaddstr"
;; (* lots more omitted *)

To compile this interface:

        camlc -c curses.mli

  To implement these functions, we just have to provide the stub code; the
core functions are already implemented in the curses library.  The stub code
file, curses.o, looks like:

#include <curses.h>
#include <mlvalues.h>

value curses_initscr(unit)
        value unit;
{


Chapter 12.  Interfacing C with Caml Light                                  92


   return  (value)  initscr();         /*  OK to  coerce  directly  from  WIN-
DOW * to value
                                   since that's a block created by malloc() */
}

value curses_wrefresh(win)
        value win;
{
  wrefresh((WINDOW *) win);
  return Val_unit;
}

value curses_newwin(nlines, ncols, x0, y0)
        value nlines, ncols, x0, y0;
{
  return (value) newwin(Int_val(nlines), Int_val(ncols),
                        Int_val(x0), Int_val(y0));
}

value curses_addch(c)
        value c;
{
  addch(Int_val(c));            /* Characters are encoded like integers */
  return Val_unit;
}

value curses_addstr(s)
        value s;
{
  addstr(String_val(s));
  return Val_unit;
}

/* This goes on for pages. */

(Actually, it would be better to create a library for the stub code, with each
stub code function in a separate file, so that linking would pick only those
functions from the curses library that are actually used.)
  The file curses.c can be compiled with:

        cc -c -I/usr/local/lib/caml-light curses.c

or, even simpler,

        camlc -c curses.c

(When passed a .c file, the camlc command simply calls cc on that file, with
the right -I option.)
  Now, here is a sample Caml Light program test.ml that uses the curses
module:

#open "curses";;
let main_window = initscr () in
let small_window = newwin 10 5 20 10 in
  mvwaddstr main_window 10 2 "Hello";
  mvwaddstr small_window 4 3 "world";
  refresh();
  for i = 1 to 100000 do () done;


Chapter 12.   Interfacing C with Caml Light                                 93


  endwin()
;;

To compile this program, run:

        camlc -c test.ml

Finally, to link everything together:

        camlc -custom -o test test.zo curses.o -lcurses
























                                   Part IV



                            The Caml Light library




































                                      94











Chapter 13



The core library



This chapter describes the functions provided by the Caml Light core library.
This library is special in two ways:

 -  It is automatically linked with the user's object code files by the camlc
    command (chapter 4).  Hence, the globals defined by these libraries can
    be used in standalone programs without having to add any .zo file on the
    command line for the linking phase.  Similarly, in interactive use, these
    globals can be used in toplevel phrases without having to load any .zo
    file in memory.

 -  The interfaces for the modules below are automatically ``opened'' when a
    compilation starts, or when the toplevel system is launched.  Hence, it
    is possible to use unqualified identifiers to refer to the functions
    provided by these modules, without adding #open directives.  Actually,
    the list of automatically opened modules depend on the -O option given to
    the compiler or to the toplevel system:

          --------------------------------------------------------------
          |-O option             |Opened   modules  (reverse   opening |
          |                      |order)                               |
          --------------------------------------------------------------
          |-O cautious (default) |io,  eq,  int,   float,  ref,  pair, |
          |                      |list, vect, char, string, bool, exc, |
          |                      |stream, builtin                      |
          |-O fast               |io, eq, int, float, ref, pair, list, |
          |                      |fvect,  fchar, fstring,  bool,  exc, |
          |                      |stream, builtin                      |
          |-O none               |builtin                              |
          --------------------------------------------------------------


Conventions

For easy reference, the modules are listed below in alphabetical order of
module names.  For each module, the declarations from its interface file are
printed one by one in typewriter font, followed by a short comment.  All
modules and the identifiers they export are indexed at the end of this report.


13.1 bool:  boolean operations

value prefix &  : bool -> bool -> bool
value prefix && : bool -> bool -> bool
value prefix or : bool -> bool -> bool
value prefix || : bool -> bool -> bool


                                      95


Chapter 13.   The core library                                              96


    The boolean and is written e1 & e2 or e1 && e2.  The boolean or is
    written e1 or e2 or e1 || e2.  Both constructs are sequential,
    left-to-right:  e2 is evaluated only if needed.  Actually, e1 & e2 is
    equivalent to if e1 then e2 else false, and e1 or e2 is equivalent to
    if e1 then true else e2.

value prefix not : bool -> bool

    The boolean negation.

value string_of_bool : bool -> string

    Return a string representing the given boolean.



13.2 builtin:  base types and constructors

    This module defines some types and exceptions for which the language
    provides special syntax, and are therefore treated specially by the
    compiler.

type int
type float
type string
type char

    The types of integers, floating-point numbers, character strings, and
    characters, respectively.

type exn

    The type of exception values.

type bool = false | true

    The type of boolean values.

type 'a vect

    The type of arrays whose elements have type 'a.

type unit = ()

    The type of the unit value.

type 'a list = [] | prefix :: of 'a * 'a list

    The type of lists.

type 'a option = None | Some of 'a

    The type of optional values.

exception Match_failure of string * int * int

    The exception raised when a pattern-matching fails.  The argument
    indicates the position in the source code of the pattern-matching (source


Chapter 13.   The core library                                              97


    file name, position of the first character of the matching, position of
    the last character.



13.3 char:  character operations

value int_of_char : char -> int

    Return the ASCII code of the argument.

value char_of_int : int -> char

    Return the character with the given ASCII code.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "char_of_int" if the argument is outside the range
    0--255.

value string_of_char : char -> string

    Return a string representing the given character.

value char_for_read : char -> string

    Return a string representing the given character, with special characters
    escaped following the lexical conventions of Caml Light.



13.4 eq:  generic comparisons

value prefix = : 'a -> 'a -> bool

    e1 = e2 tests for structural equality of e1 and e2.  Mutable structures
    (e.g.  references and arrays) are equal if and only if their current
    contents are structurally equal, even if the two mutable objects are not
    the same physical object.  Equality between functional values raises
    Invalid_argument.  Equality between cyclic data structures may not
    terminate.

value prefix <> : 'a -> 'a -> bool

    Negation of prefix =.

value prefix < : 'a -> 'a -> bool
value prefix <= : 'a -> 'a -> bool
value prefix > : 'a -> 'a -> bool
value prefix >= : 'a -> 'a -> bool

    Structural ordering functions.  These functions coincide with the usual
    orderings over integer, string and floating-point numbers, and extend
    them to a total ordering over all types.  The ordering is compatible with
    prefix =.  As in the case of prefix =, mutable structures are compared by
    contents.  Comparison between functional values raises Invalid_argument.
    Comparison between cyclic structures may not terminate.

value compare: 'a -> 'a -> int


Chapter 13.   The core library                                              98


    compare x y returns 0 if x=y, a negative integer if x<y, and a positive
    integer if x>y.  The same restrictions as for = apply.  compare can be
    used as the comparison function required by the set and map modules.

value min: 'a -> 'a -> 'a

    Return the smaller of the two arguments.

value max: 'a -> 'a -> 'a

    Return the greater of the two arguments.

value prefix == : 'a -> 'a -> bool

    e1 == e2 tests for physical equality of e1 and e2.  On integers and
    characters, it is the same as structural equality.  On mutable
    structures, e1 == e2 is true if and only if physical modification of e1
    also affects e2.  On non-mutable structures, the behavior of prefix == is
    implementation-dependent, except that e1 == e2 implies e1 = e2.

value prefix != : 'a -> 'a -> bool

    Negation of prefix ==.



13.5 exc:  exceptions

value raise : exn -> 'a

    Raise the given exception value.


A few general-purpose predefined exceptions.

exception Out_of_memory

    Raised by the garbage collector, when there is insufficient memory to
    complete the computation.

exception Invalid_argument of string

    Raised by library functions to signal that the given arguments do not
    make sense.

exception Failure of string

    Raised by library functions to signal that they are undefined on the
    given arguments.

exception Not_found

    Raised by search functions when the desired object could not be found.

exception Exit

    This exception is not raised by any library function.  It is provided for
    use in your programs.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                              99


value failwith : string -> 'a

    Raise exception Failure with the given string.

value invalid_arg : string -> 'a

    Raise exception Invalid_argument with the given string.



13.6 fchar:  character operations, without sanity checks

    This module implements the same functions as the char module, but does
    not perform bound checks on the arguments of the functions.  The
    functions are therefore faster than those in the char module, but calling
    these functions with incorrect parameters (that is, parameters that would
    cause the Invalid_argument exception to be raised by the corresponding
    functions in the char module) can crash the program.



13.7 float:  operations on floating-point numbers

value int_of_float : float -> int

    Truncate the given float to an integer value.  The result is unspecified
    if it falls outside the range of representable integers.

value float_of_int : int -> float

    Convert an integer to floating-point.

value minus : float -> float
value minus_float : float -> float

    Unary negation.

value prefix + : float -> float -> float
value prefix +. : float -> float -> float
value add_float : float -> float -> float

    Addition.

value prefix - : float -> float -> float
value prefix -. : float -> float -> float
value sub_float : float -> float -> float

    Subtraction.

value prefix * : float -> float -> float
value prefix *. : float -> float -> float
value mult_float : float -> float -> float

    Product.

value prefix / : float -> float -> float
value prefix /. : float -> float -> float
value div_float : float -> float -> float


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             100


    Division.

value prefix ** : float -> float -> float
value prefix **. : float -> float -> float
value power : float -> float -> float

    Exponentiation.

value eq_float : float -> float -> bool
value prefix =. : float -> float -> bool

    Floating-point equality.  Equivalent to generic equality, just faster.

value neq_float : float -> float -> bool
value prefix <>. : float -> float -> bool

    Negation of eq_float.

value prefix <. : float -> float -> bool
value lt_float : float -> float -> bool
value prefix >. : float -> float -> bool
value gt_float : float -> float -> bool
value prefix <=. : float -> float -> bool
value le_float : float -> float -> bool
value prefix >=. : float -> float -> bool
value ge_float : float -> float -> bool

    Usual comparisons between floating-point numbers.

value acos : float -> float
value asin : float -> float
value atan : float -> float
value atan2 : float -> float -> float
value cos : float -> float
value cosh : float -> float
value exp : float -> float
value log : float -> float
value log10 : float -> float
value sin : float -> float
value sinh : float -> float
value sqrt : float -> float
value tan : float -> float
value tanh : float -> float

    Usual transcendental functions on floating-point numbers.

value ceil : float -> float
value floor : float -> float

    Round the given float to an integer value.  floor f returns the greatest
    integer value less than or equal to f.  ceil f returns the least integer
    value greater than or equal to f.

value abs_float : float -> float

    Return the absolute value of the argument.


Chapter 13.  The core library                                              101


value mod_float : float -> float -> float

    fmod a b returns the remainder of a with respect to b.

value frexp : float -> float * int

    frexp f returns the pair of the significant and the exponent of f (when f
    is zero, the significant x and the exponent n of f are equal to zero;
    when f is non-zero, they are defined by f = x *. 2 ** n).

value ldexp : float -> int -> float

    ldexp x n returns x *. 2 ** n.

value modf : float -> float * float

    modf f returns the pair of the fractional and integral part of f.

value string_of_float : float -> string

    Convert the given float to its decimal representation.

value float_of_string : string -> float

    Convert the given string to a float, in decimal.  The result is
    unspecified if the given string is not a valid representation of a float.



13.8 fstring:  string operations, without sanity checks

    This module implements the same functions as the string module, but does
    not perform bound checks on the arguments of the functions.  The
    functions are therefore faster than those in the string module, but
    calling these functions with incorrect parameters (that is, parameters
    that would cause the Invalid_argument exception to be raised by the
    corresponding functions in the string module) can crash the program.



13.9 fvect:  operations on vectors, without sanity checks

    This module implements the same functions as the vect module, but does
    not perform bound checks on the arguments of the functions.  The
    functions are therefore faster than those in the vect module, but calling
    these functions with incorrect parameters (that is, parameters that would
    cause the Invalid_argument exception to be raised by the corresponding
    functions in the vect module) can crash the program.



13.10 int:  operations on integers

    Integers are 31 bits wide (or 63 bits on 64-bit processors).  All
                                 31      63
    operations are taken modulo 2   (or 2  ).  They do not fail on overflow.

exception Division_by_zero
value minus : int -> int


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             102


value minus_int : int -> int

    Unary negation.  You can write -e instead of minus e.

value succ : int -> int

    succ x is x+1.

value pred : int -> int

    pred x is x-1.

value prefix + : int -> int -> int
value add_int : int -> int -> int

    Addition.

value prefix - : int -> int -> int
value sub_int : int -> int -> int

    Subtraction.

value prefix * : int -> int -> int
value mult_int : int -> int -> int

    Multiplication.

value prefix / : int -> int -> int
value div_int : int -> int -> int
value prefix quo : int -> int -> int

    Integer division.  Raise Division_by_zero if the second argument is 0.
    Give unpredictable results if either argument is negative.

value prefix mod : int -> int -> int

    Remainder.  Raise Division_by_zero if the second argument is 0.  Give
    unpredictable results if either argument is negative.

value eq_int : int -> int -> bool

    Integer equality.  Equivalent to generic equality, just faster.

value neq_int : int -> int -> bool

    Negation of eq_int.

value lt_int : int -> int -> bool
value gt_int : int -> int -> bool
value le_int : int -> int -> bool
value ge_int : int -> int -> bool

    Usual comparisons between integers.

value abs : int -> int

    Return the absolute value of the argument.


Chapter 13.  The core library                                              103


value max_int : int
value min_int : int

    The greatest and smallest integer values.


Bitwise operations

value prefix land : int -> int -> int

    Bitwise logical and.

value prefix lor : int -> int -> int

    Bitwise logical or.

value prefix lxor : int -> int -> int

    Bitwise logical exclusive or.

value lnot : int -> int

    Bitwise complement

value prefix lsl : int -> int -> int
value lshift_left : int -> int -> int

    n lsl m, or equivalently lshift_left n m, shifts n to the left by m bits.

value prefix lsr : int -> int -> int

    n lsr m shifts n to the right by m bits.  This is a logical shift:
    zeroes are inserted regardless of sign.

value prefix asr : int -> int -> int
value lshift_right : int -> int -> int

    n asr m, or equivalently lshift_right n m, shifts n to the right by m
    bits.  This is an arithmetic shift:  the sign bit is replicated.


Conversion functions

value string_of_int : int -> string

    Convert the given integer to its decimal representation.

value int_of_string : string -> int

    Convert the given string to an integer, in decimal (by default) or in
    hexadecimal, octal or binary if the string begins with 0x, 0o or 0b.
    Raise Failure "int_of_string" if the given string is not a valid
    representation of an integer.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             104


13.11 io:  buffered input and output

type in_channel
type out_channel

    The abstract types of input channels and output channels.

exception End_of_file

    Raised when an operation cannot complete, because the end of the file has
    been reached.

value stdin : in_channel
value std_in : in_channel
value stdout : out_channel
value std_out : out_channel
value stderr : out_channel
value std_err : out_channel

    The standard input, standard output, and standard error output for the
    process.  std_in, std_out and std_err are respectively synonymous with
    stdin, stdout and stderr.

value exit : int -> 'a

    Flush all pending writes on std_out and std_err, and terminate the
    process, returning the given status code to the operating system (usually
    0 to indicate no errors, and a small positive integer to indicate
    failure.)  This function should be called at the end of all standalone
    programs that output results on std_out or std_err; otherwise, the
    program may appear to produce no output, or its output may be truncated.


Output functions on standard output

value print_char : char -> unit

    Print the character on standard output.

value print_string : string -> unit

    Print the string on standard output.

value print_int : int -> unit

    Print the integer, in decimal, on standard output.

value print_float : float -> unit

    Print the floating-point number, in decimal, on standard output.

value print_endline : string -> unit

    Print the string, followed by a newline character, on standard output.

value print_newline : unit -> unit


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             105


    Print a newline character on standard output, and flush standard output.
    This can be used to simulate line buffering of standard output.


Output functions on standard error

value prerr_char : char -> unit

    Print the character on standard error.

value prerr_string : string -> unit

    Print the string on standard error.

value prerr_int : int -> unit

    Print the integer, in decimal, on standard error.

value prerr_float : float -> unit

    Print the floating-point number, in decimal, on standard error.

value prerr_endline : string -> unit

    Print the string, followed by a newline character on standard error and
    flush standard error.


Input functions on standard input

value read_line : unit -> string

    Flush standard output, then read characters from standard input until a
    newline character is encountered.  Return the string of all characters
    read, without the newline character at the end.

value read_int : unit -> int

    Flush standard output, then read one line from standard input and convert
    it to an integer.  Raise Failure "int_of_string" if the line read is not
    a valid representation of an integer.

value read_float : unit -> float

    Flush standard output, then read one line from standard input and convert
    it to a floating-point number.  The result is unspecified if the line
    read is not a valid representation of a floating-point number.


General output functions

value open_out : string -> out_channel

    Open the named file for writing, and return a new output channel on that
    file, positionned at the beginning of the file.  The file is truncated to
    zero length if it already exists.  It is created if it does not already
    exists.  Raise sys__Sys_error if the file could not be opened.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             106


value open_out_bin : string -> out_channel

    Same as open_out, but the file is opened in binary mode, so that no
    translation takes place during writes.  On operating systems that do not
    distinguish between text mode and binary mode, this function behaves like
    open_out.

value open_out_gen : sys__open_flag list -> int -> string -> out_channel

    open_out_gen mode rights filename opens the file named filename for
    writing, as above.  The extra argument mode specify the opening mode (see
    sys__open).  The extra argument rights specifies the file permissions, in
    case the file must be created (see sys__open).  open_out and open_out_bin
    are special cases of this function.

value open_descriptor_out : int -> out_channel

    open_descriptor_out fd returns a buffered output channel writing to the
    file descriptor fd.  The file descriptor fd must have been previously
    opened for writing, else the behavior is undefined.

value flush : out_channel -> unit

    Flush the buffer associated with the given output channel, performing all
    pending writes on that channel.  Interactive programs must be careful
    about flushing std_out and std_err at the right time.

value output_char : out_channel -> char -> unit

    Write the character on the given output channel.

value output_string : out_channel -> string -> unit

    Write the string on the given output channel.

value output : out_channel -> string -> int -> int -> unit

    output chan buff ofs len writes len characters from string buff, starting
    at offset ofs, to the output channel chan.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "output" if ofs and len do not designate a valid
    substring of buff.

value output_byte : out_channel -> int -> unit

    Write one 8-bit integer (as the single character with that code) on the
    given output channel.  The given integer is taken modulo 256.

value output_binary_int : out_channel -> int -> unit

    Write one integer in binary format on the given output channel.  The only
    reliable way to read it back is through the input_binary_int function.
    The format is compatible across all machines for a given version of Caml
    Light.

value output_value : out_channel -> 'a -> unit

    Write the representation of a structured value of any type to a channel.
    Circularities and sharing inside the value are detected and preserved.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             107


    The object can be read back, by the function input_value.  The format is
    compatible across all machines for a given version of Caml Light.

value output_compact_value : out_channel -> 'a -> unit

    Same as output_value, but uses a different format, which occupies less
    space on the file, but takes more time to generate and read back.

value seek_out : out_channel -> int -> unit

    seek_out chan pos sets the current writing position to pos for channel
    chan.  This works only for regular files.  On files of other kinds (such
    as terminals, pipes and sockets), the behavior is unspecified.

value pos_out : out_channel -> int

    Return the current writing position for the given channel.

value out_channel_length : out_channel -> int

    Return the total length (number of characters) of the given channel.
    This works only for regular files.  On files of other kinds, the result
    is meaningless.

value close_out : out_channel -> unit

    Close the given channel, flushing all buffered write operations.  The
    behavior is unspecified if any of the functions above is called on a
    closed channel.


General input functions

value open_in : string -> in_channel

    Open the named file for reading, and return a new input channel on that
    file, positionned at the beginning of the file.  Raise sys__Sys_error if
    the file could not be opened.

value open_in_bin : string -> in_channel

    Same as open_in, but the file is opened in binary mode, so that no
    translation takes place during reads.  On operating systems that do not
    distinguish between text mode and binary mode, this function behaves like
    open_in.

value open_in_gen : sys__open_flag list -> int -> string -> in_channel

    open_in_gen mode rights filename opens the file named filename for
    reading, as above.  The extra arguments mode and rights specify the
    opening mode and file permissions (see sys__open).  open_in and
    open_in_bin are special cases of this function.

value open_descriptor_in : int -> in_channel

    open_descriptor_in fd returns a buffered input channel reading from the
    file descriptor fd.  The file descriptor fd must have been previously
    opened for reading, else the behavior is undefined.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             108


value input_char : in_channel -> char

    Read one character from the given input channel.  Raise End_of_file if
    there are no more characters to read.

value input_line : in_channel -> string

    Read characters from the given input channel, until a newline character
    is encountered.  Return the string of all characters read, without the
    newline character at the end.  Raise End_of_file if the end of the file
    is reached at the beginning of line.

value input : in_channel -> string -> int -> int -> int

    input chan buff ofs len attempts to read len characters from channel
    chan, storing them in string buff, starting at character number ofs.  It
    returns the actual number of characters read, between 0 and len
    (inclusive).  A return value of 0 means that the end of file was reached.
    A return value between 0 and len exclusive means that no more characters
    were available at that time; input must be called again to read the
    remaining characters, if desired.  Exception Invalid_argument "input" is
    raised if ofs and len do not designate a valid substring of buff.

value really_input : in_channel -> string -> int -> int -> unit

    really_input chan buff ofs len reads len characters from channel chan,
    storing them in string buff, starting at character number ofs.  Raise
    End_of_file if the end of file is reached before len characters have been
    read.  Raise Invalid_argument "really_input" if ofs and len do not
    designate a valid substring of buff.

value input_byte : in_channel -> int

    Same as input_char, but return the 8-bit integer representing the
    character.  Raise End_of_file if an end of file was reached.

value input_binary_int : in_channel -> int

    Read an integer encoded in binary format from the given input channel.
    See output_binary_int.  Raise End_of_file if an end of file was reached
    while reading the integer.

value input_value : in_channel -> 'a

    Read the representation of a structured value, as produced by
    output_value or output_compact_value, and return the corresponding value.
    This is not type-safe.  The type of the returned object is not 'a
    properly speaking:  the returned object has one unique type, which cannot
    be determined at compile-time.  The programmer should explicitly give the
    expected type of the returned value, using the following syntax:
    (input_value chan : type).  The behavior is unspecified if the object in
    the file does not belong to the given type.

value seek_in : in_channel -> int -> unit

    seek_in chan pos sets the current reading position to pos for channel
    chan.  This works only for regular files.  On files of other kinds, the
    behavior is unspecified.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             109


value pos_in : in_channel -> int

    Return the current reading position for the given channel.

value in_channel_length : in_channel -> int

    Return the total length (number of characters) of the given channel.
    This works only for regular files.  On files of other kinds, the result
    is meaningless.

value close_in : in_channel -> unit

    Close the given channel.  Anything can happen if any of the functions
    above is called on a closed channel.



13.12 list:  operations on lists

value list_length : 'a list -> int

    Return the length (number of elements) of the given list.

value prefix @ : 'a list -> 'a list -> 'a list

    List concatenation.

value hd : 'a list -> 'a

    Return the first element of the given list.  Raise Failure "hd" if the
    list is empty.

value tl : 'a list -> 'a list

    Return the given list without its first element.  Raise Failure "tl" if
    the list is empty.

value rev : 'a list -> 'a list

    List reversal.

value map : ('a -> 'b) -> 'a list -> 'b list

    map f [a1; ...; an] applies function f to a1, ..., an, and builds the
    list [f a1; ...; f an] with the results returned by f.

value do_list : ('a -> unit) -> 'a list -> unit

    do_list f [a1; ...; an] applies function f in turn to a1; ...; an,
    discarding all the results.  It is equivalent to
    begin f a1; f a2; ...; f an; () end.

value it_list : ('a -> 'b -> 'a) -> 'a -> 'b list -> 'a

    it_list f a [b1; ...; bn] is f (... (f (f a b1) b2) ...) bn.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             110


value list_it : ('a -> 'b -> 'b) -> 'a list -> 'b -> 'b

    list_it f [a1; ...; an] b is f a1 (f a2 (... (f an b) ...)).

value map2 : ('a -> 'b -> 'c) -> 'a list -> 'b list -> 'c list

    map2 f [a1; ...; an] [b1; ...; bn] is [f a1 b1; ...; f an bn].  Raise
    Invalid_argument "map2" if the two lists have different lengths.

value do_list2 : ('a -> 'b -> unit) -> 'a list -> 'b list -> unit

    do_list2 f [a1; ...; an] [b1; ...; bn] calls in turn
    f a1 b1; ...; f an bn, discarding the results.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "do_list2" if the two lists have different lengths.

value it_list2 : ('a -> 'b -> 'c -> 'a) -> 'a -> 'b list -> 'c list -> 'a

    it_list2 f a [b1; ...; bn] [c1; ...; cn] is
    f (... (f (f a b1 c1) b2 c2) ...) bn cn.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "it_list2" if the two lists have different lengths.

value list_it2 : ('a -> 'b -> 'c -> 'c) -> 'a list -> 'b list -> 'c -> 'c

    list_it2 f [a1; ...; an] [b1; ...; bn] c is
    f a1 b1 (f a2 b2 (... (f an bn c) ...)).  Raise
    Invalid_argument "list_it2" if the two lists have different lengths.

value flat_map : ('a -> 'b list) -> 'a list -> 'b list

    flat_map f [l1; ...; ln] is (f l1) @ (f l2) @ ... @ (f ln).

value for_all : ('a -> bool) -> 'a list -> bool

    for_all p [a1; ...; an] is (p a1) & (p a2) & ... & (p an).

value exists : ('a -> bool) -> 'a list -> bool

    exists p [a1; ...; an] is (p a1) or (p a2) or ... or (p an).

value mem : 'a -> 'a list -> bool

    mem a l is true if and only if a is structurally equal (see module eq) to
    an element of l.

value memq : 'a -> 'a list -> bool

    memq a l is true if and only if a is physically equal (see module eq) to
    an element of l.

value except : 'a -> 'a list -> 'a list

    except a l returns the list l where the first element structurally equal
    to a has been removed.  The list l is returned unchanged if it does not
    contain a.

value exceptq : 'a -> 'a list -> 'a list

    Same as except, with physical equality instead of structural equality.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             111


value subtract : 'a list -> 'a list -> 'a list

    subtract l1 l2 returns the list l1 where all elements structurally equal
    to one of the elements of l2 have been removed.

value union : 'a list -> 'a list -> 'a list

    union l1 l2 appends before list l2 all the elements of list l1 that are
    not structurally equal to an element of l2.

value intersect : 'a list -> 'a list -> 'a list

    intersect l1 l2 returns the list of the elements of l1 that are
    structurally equal to an element of l2.

value index : 'a -> 'a list -> int

    index a l returns the position of the first element of list l that is
    structurally equal to a.  The head of the list has position 0.  Raise
    Not_found if a is not present in l.

value assoc : 'a -> ('a * 'b) list -> 'b

    assoc a l returns the value associated with key a in the list of pairs l.
    That is, assoc a [ ...; (a,b); ...] = b if (a,b) is the leftmost binding
    of a in list l.  Raise Not_found if there is no value associated with a
    in the list l.

value assq :  'a -> ('a * 'b) list -> 'b

    Same as assoc, but use physical equality instead of structural equality
    to compare keys.

value mem_assoc : 'a -> ('a * 'b) list -> bool

    Same as assoc, but simply return true if a binding exists, and false if
    no bindings exist for the given key.



13.13 pair:  operations on pairs

value fst : 'a * 'b -> 'a

    Return the first component of a pair.

value snd : 'a * 'b -> 'b

    Return the second component of a pair.

value split : ('a * 'b) list -> 'a list * 'b list

    Transform a list of pairs into a pair of lists:
    split [(a1,b1); ...; (an,bn)] is ([a1; ...; an], [b1; ...; bn])

value combine : 'a list * 'b list -> ('a * 'b) list


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             112


    Transform a pair of lists into a list of pairs:
    combine ([a1; ...; an], [b1; ...; bn]) is [(a1,b1); ...; (an,bn)].  Raise
    Invalid_argument "combine" if the two lists have different lengths.

value map_combine : ('a * 'b -> 'c) -> 'a list * 'b list -> 'c list

    map_combine f ([a1; ...; an], [b1; ...; bn]) is
    [f (a1, b1); ...; f (an, bn)].  Raise invalid_argument "map_combine" if
    the two lists have different lengths.

value do_list_combine : ('a * 'b -> unit) -> 'a list * 'b list -> unit

    do_list_combine f ([a1; ...; an], [b1; ...; bn]) calls in turn
    f (a1, b1); ...; f (an, bn), discarding the results.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "do_list_combine" if the two lists have different
    lengths.



13.14 ref:  operations on references

type 'a ref = ref of mutable 'a

    The type of references (mutable indirection cells) containing a value of
    type 'a.

value prefix ! : 'a ref -> 'a

    !r returns the current contents of reference r.  Could be defined as
    fun (ref x) -> x.

value prefix := : 'a ref -> 'a -> unit

    r := a stores the value of a in reference r.

value incr : int ref -> unit

    Increment the integer contained in the given reference.  Could be defined
    as fun r -> r := succ !r.

value decr : int ref -> unit

    Decrement the integer contained in the given reference.  Could be defined
    as fun r -> r := pred !r.



13.15 stream:  operations on streams

type 'a stream

    The type of streams containing values of type 'a.

exception Parse_failure

    Raised by parsers when none of the first component of the stream patterns
    is accepted


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             113


exception Parse_error

    Raised by parsers when the first component of a stream pattern is
    accepted, but one of the following components is rejected

value stream_next : 'a stream -> 'a

    stream_next s returns the first element of stream s, and removes it from
    the stream.  Raise Parse_failure if the stream is empty.

value stream_from : (unit -> 'a) -> 'a stream

    stream_from f returns the stream which fetches its terminals using the
    function f.  This function could be defined as:
        let rec stream_from f = [< 'f(); stream_from f >]
    but is implemented more efficiently.

value stream_of_string : string -> char stream

    stream_of_string s returns the stream of the characters in string s.

value stream_of_channel : in_channel -> char stream

    stream_of_channel ic returns the stream of characters read on channel ic.

value do_stream : ('a -> unit) -> 'a stream -> unit

    do_stream f s scans the whole stream s, applying the function f in turn
    to each terminal encountered

value stream_check : ('a -> bool) -> 'a stream -> 'a

    stream_check p returns the parser which returns the first terminal of the
    stream if the predicate p returns true on this terminal, and raises
    Parse_failure otherwise.

value end_of_stream : 'a stream -> unit

    Return () iff the stream is empty, and raise Parse_failure otherwise.

value stream_get : 'a stream -> 'a * 'a stream

    stream_get s return the first element of the stream s, and a stream
    containing the remaining elements of s.  Raise Parse_failure if the
    stream is empty.  The stream s is not modified.  This function makes it
    possible to access a stream non-destructively.



13.16 string:  string operations

value string_length : string -> int

    Return the length (number of characters) of the given string.

value nth_char : string -> int -> char


Chapter 13.  The core library                                              114


    nth_char s n returns character number n in string s.  The first character
    is character number 0.  The last character is character number
    string_length s - 1.  Raise Invalid_argument "nth_char" if n is ouside
    the range 0 to (string_length s - 1).  You can also write s.[n] instead
    of nth_char s n.

value set_nth_char : string -> int -> char -> unit

    set_nth_char s n c modifies string s in place, replacing the character
    number n by c.  Raise Invalid_argument "set_nth_char" if n is ouside the
    range 0 to (string_length s - 1).  You can also write s.[n] <- c instead
    of set_nth_char s n c.

value prefix ^ : string -> string -> string

    s1 ^ s2 returns a fresh string containing the concatenation of the
    strings s1 and s2.

value concat : string list -> string

    Return a fresh string containing the concatenation of all the strings in
    the argument list.

value sub_string : string -> int -> int -> string

    sub_string s start len returns a fresh string of length len, containing
    the characters number start to start + len - 1 of string s.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "sub_string" if start and len do not designate a valid
    substring of s; that is, if start < 0, or len < 0, or
    start + len > string_length s.

value create_string : int -> string

    create_string n returns a fresh string of length n.  The string initially
    contains arbitrary characters.

value make_string : int -> char -> string

    make_string n c returns a fresh string of length n, filled with the
    character c.

value fill_string : string -> int -> int -> char -> unit

    fill_string s start len c modifies string s in place, replacing the
    characters number start to start + len - 1 by c.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "fill_string" if start and len do not designate a valid
    substring of s.

value blit_string : string -> int -> string -> int -> int -> unit

    blit_string s1 o1 s2 o2 len copies len characters from string s1,
    starting at character number o1, to string s2, starting at character
    number o2.  It works correctly even if s1 and s2 are the same string, and
    the source and destination chunks overlap.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "blit_string" if o1 and len do not designate a valid
    substring of s1, or if o2 and len do not designate a valid substring of
    s2.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             115


value replace_string : string -> string -> int -> unit

    replace_string dest src start copies all characters from the string src
    into the string dst, starting at character number start in dst.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "replace_string" if copying would overflow string dest.

value eq_string : string -> string -> bool
value neq_string : string -> string -> bool
value le_string : string -> string -> bool
value lt_string : string -> string -> bool
value ge_string : string -> string -> bool
value gt_string : string -> string -> bool

    Comparison functions (lexicographic ordering) between strings.

value compare_strings : string -> string -> int

    General comparison between strings.  compare_strings s1 s2 returns 0 if
    s1 and s2 are equal, or else -2 if s1 is a prefix of s2, or 2 if s2 is a
    prefix of s1, or else -1 if s1 is lexicographically before s2, or 1 if s2
    is lexicographically before s1.

value string_for_read : string -> string

    Return a copy of the argument, with special characters represented by
    escape sequences, following the lexical conventions of Caml Light.

value index_char: string -> char -> int

    index_char s c returns the position of the leftmost occurrence of
    character c in string s.  Raise Not_found if c does not occur in s.

value rindex_char: string -> char -> int

    rindex_char s c returns the position of the rightmost occurrence of
    character c in string s.  Raise Not_found if c does not occur in s.

value index_char_from: string -> int -> char -> int
value rindex_char_from: string -> int -> char -> int

    Same as index_char and rindex_char, but start searching at the character
    position given as second argument.  index_char s c is equivalent to
    index_char_from s 0 c, and rindex_char s c to
    rindex_char_from s (string_length s - 1) c.



13.17 vect:  operations on vectors

value vect_length : 'a vect -> int

    Return the length (number of elements) of the given vector.

value vect_item : 'a vect -> int -> 'a

    vect_item v n returns the element number n of vector v.  The first
    element has number 0.  The last element has number vect_length v - 1.


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             116


    Raise Invalid_argument "vect_item" if n is outside the range 0 to
    (vect_length v - 1).  You can also write v.(n) instead of vect_item v n.

value vect_assign : 'a vect -> int -> 'a -> unit

    vect_assign v n x modifies vector v in place, replacing element number n
    with x.  Raise Invalid_argument "vect_assign" if n is outside the range 0
    to vect_length v - 1.  You can also write v.(n) <- x instead of
    vect_assign v n x.

value make_vect : int -> 'a -> 'a vect

    make_vect n x returns a fresh vector of length n, initialized with x.
    All the elements of this new vector are initially physically equal to x
    (see module eq).  Consequently, if x is mutable, it is shared among all
    elements of the vector, and modifying x through one of the vector entries
    will modify all other entries at the same time.

value make_matrix : int -> int -> 'a -> 'a vect vect

    make_matrix dimx dimy e returns a two-dimensional array (a vector of
    vectors) with first dimension dimx and second dimension dimy.  All the
    elements of this new matrix are initially physically equal to e.  The
    element (x,y) of a matrix m is accessed with the notation m.(x).(y).

value init_vect : int -> (int -> 'a) -> 'a vect

    init_vect n f returns a fresh array of length n, with element number i
    equal to f i.

value concat_vect : 'a vect -> 'a vect -> 'a vect

    concat_vect v1 v2 returns a fresh vector containing the concatenation of
    vectors v1 and v2.

value sub_vect : 'a vect -> int -> int -> 'a vect

    sub_vect v start len returns a fresh vector of length len, containing the
    elements number start to start + len - 1 of vector v.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "sub_vect" if start and len do not designate a valid
    subvector of v; that is, if start < 0, or len < 0, or
    start + len > vect_length v.

value copy_vect : 'a vect -> 'a vect

    copy_vect v returns a copy of v, that is, a fresh vector containing the
    same elements as v.

value fill_vect : 'a vect -> int -> int -> 'a -> unit

    fill_vect v ofs len x modifies the vector v in place, storing x in
    elements number ofs to ofs + len - 1.  Raise Invalid_argument "fill_vect"
    if ofs and len do not designate a valid subvector of v.

value blit_vect : 'a vect -> int -> 'a vect -> int -> int -> unit

    blit_vect v1 o1 v2 o2 len copies len elements from vector v1, starting at
    element number o1, to vector v2, starting at element number o2.  It works


Chapter 13.   The core library                                             117


    correctly even if v1 and v2 are the same vector, and the source and
    destination chunks overlap.  Raise Invalid_argument "blit_vect" if o1 and
    len do not designate a valid subvector of v1, or if o2 and len do not
    designate a valid subvector of v2.

value list_of_vect : 'a vect -> 'a list

    list_of_vect v returns the list of all the elements of v, that is:
    [v.(0); v.(1); ...; v.(vect_length v - 1)].

value vect_of_list : 'a list -> 'a vect

    vect_of_list l returns a fresh vector containing the elements of l.

value map_vect : ('a -> 'b) -> 'a vect -> 'b vect

    map_vect f v applies function f to all the elements of v, and builds a
    vector with the results returned by f:
    [| f v.(0); f v.(1); ...; f v.(vect_length v - 1) |].

value map_vect_list : ('a -> 'b) -> 'a vect -> 'b list

    map_vect_list f v applies function f to all the elements of v, and builds
    a list with the results returned by f:
    [ f v.(0); f v.(1); ...; f v.(vect_length v - 1) ].

value do_vect : ('a -> unit) -> 'a vect -> unit

    do_vect f v applies function f in turn to all the elements of v,
    discarding all the results:
    f v.(0); f v.(1); ...; f v.(vect_length v - 1); ().











Chapter 14



The standard library



This chapter describes the functions provided by the Caml Light standard
library.  Just as the modules from the core library, the modules from the
standard library are automatically linked with the user's object code files by
the camlc command.  Hence, the globals defined by these libraries can be used
in standalone programs without having to add any .zo file on the command line
for the linking phase.  Similarly, in interactive use, these globals can be
used in toplevel phrases without having to load any .zo file in memory.
  Unlike the modules from the core library, the modules from the standard
library are not automatically ``opened'' when a compilation starts, or when
the toplevel system is launched.  Hence it is necessary to use qualified
identifiers to refer to the functions provided by these modules, or to add
#open directives.


Conventions

For easy reference, the modules are listed below in alphabetical order of
module names.  For each module, the declarations from its interface file are
printed one by one in typewriter font, followed by a short comment.  All
modules and the identifiers they export are indexed at the end of this report.


14.1 arg:  parsing of command line arguments

    This module provides a general mechanism for extracting options and
    arguments from the command line to the program.


    Syntax of command lines:  A keyword is a character string starting with a
    -.  An option is a keyword alone or followed by an argument.  There are
    four types of keywords:  Unit, String, Int, and Float.  Unit keywords do
    not take an argument.  String, Int, and Float keywords take the following
    word on the command line as an argument.  Arguments not preceded by a
    keyword are called anonymous arguments.


    Examples (cmd is assumed to be the command name):
    cmd -flag           (a unit option)
    cmd -int 1          (an int option with argument 1)
    cmd -string foobar  (a string option with argument "foobar")
    cmd -float 12.34    (a float option with argument 12.34)
    cmd 1 2 3           (three anonymous arguments:  "1", "2", and "3")
    cmd 1 2 -flag 3 -string bar 4
                        (four anonymous arguments, a unit option, and


                                     118


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         119


                         a string option with argument "bar")

type spec =
  String of (string -> unit)
| Int of (int -> unit)
| Unit of (unit -> unit)
| Float of (float -> unit)

    The concrete type describing the behavior associated with a keyword.

value parse : (string * spec) list -> (string -> unit) -> unit

    parse speclist anonfun parses the command line, calling the functions in
    speclist whenever appropriate, and anonfun on anonymous arguments.  The
    functions are called in the same order as they appear on the command
    line.  The strings in the (string * spec) list are keywords and must
    start with a -, else they are ignored.  For the user to be able to
    specify anonymous arguments starting with a -, include for example
    ("--", String anonfun) in speclist.

exception Bad of string

    Functions in speclist or anonfun can raise Bad with an error message to
    reject invalid arguments.



14.2 baltree:  basic balanced binary trees

    This module implements balanced ordered binary trees.  All operations
    over binary trees are applicative (no side-effects).  The set and map
    modules are based on this module.  This modules gives a more direct
    access to the internals of the binary tree implementation than the set
    and map abstractions, but is more delicate to use and not as safe.  For
    advanced users only.

type 'a t = Empty | Node of 'a t * 'a * 'a t * int

    The type of trees containing elements of type 'a.  Empty is the empty
    tree (containing no elements).

type 'a contents = Nothing | Something of 'a

    Used with the functions modify and split, to represent the presence or
    the absence of an element in a tree.

value add: ('a -> int) -> 'a -> 'a t -> 'a t

    add f x t inserts the element x into the tree t.  f is an ordering
    function:  f y must return 0 if x and y are equal (or equivalent), a
    negative integer if x is smaller than y, and a positive integer if x is
    greater than y.  The tree t is returned unchanged if it already contains
    an element equivalent to x (that is, an element y such that f y is 0).
    The ordering f must be consistent with the orderings used to build t with
    add, remove, modify or split operations.

value contains: ('a -> int) -> 'a t -> bool


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         120


    contains f t checks whether t contains an element satisfying f, that is,
    an element x such that f x is 0.  f is an ordering function with the same
    constraints as for add.  It can be coarser (identify more elements) than
    the orderings used to build t, but must be consistent with them.

value find: ('a -> int) -> 'a t -> 'a

    Same as contains, except that find f t returns the element x such that
    f x is 0, or raises Not_found if none has been found.

value remove: ('a -> int) -> 'a t -> 'a t

    remove f t removes one element x of t such that f x is 0.  f is an
    ordering function with the same constraints as for add.  t is returned
    unchanged if it does not contain any element satisfying f.  If several
    elements of t satisfy f, only one is removed.

value modify: ('a -> int) -> ('a contents -> 'a contents) -> 'a t -> 'a t

    General insertion/modification/deletion function.  modify f g t searchs t
    for an element x satisfying the ordering function f.  If one is found, g
    is applied to Something x; if g returns Nothing, the element x is
    removed; if g returns Something y, the element y replaces x in the tree.
    (It is assumed that x and y are equivalent, in particular, that f y is
    0.)  If the tree does not contain any x satisfying f, g is applied to
    Nothing; if it returns Nothing, the tree is returned unchanged; if it
    returns Something x, the element x is inserted in the tree.  (It is
    assumed that f x is 0.)  The functions add and remove are special cases
    of modify, slightly more efficient.

value split: ('a -> int) -> 'a t -> 'a t * 'a contents * 'a t

    split f t returns a triple (less, elt, greater) where less is a tree
    containing all elements x of t such that f x is negative, greater is a
    tree containing all elements x of t such that f x is positive, and elt is
    Something x if t contains an element x such that f x is 0, and Nothing
    otherwise.

value compare: ('a -> 'a -> int) -> 'a t -> 'a t -> int

    Compare two trees.  The first argument f is a comparison function over
    the tree elements:  f e1 e2 is zero if the elements e1 and e2 are equal,
    negative if e1 is smaller than e2, and positive if e1 is greater than e2.
    compare f t1 t2 compares the fringes of t1 and t2 by lexicographic
    extension of f.



14.3 filename:  operations on file names

value current_dir_name : string

    The conventional name for the current directory (e.g.  . in Unix).

value concat : string -> string -> string

    concat dir file returns a file name that designates file file in
    directory dir.


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         121


value is_absolute : string -> bool

    Return true if the file name is absolute or starts with an explicit
    reference to the current directory (./ or ../ in Unix), and false if it
    is relative to the current directory.

value check_suffix : string -> string -> bool

    check_suffix name suff returns true if the filename name ends with the
    suffix suff.

value chop_suffix : string -> string -> string

    chop_suffix name suff removes the suffix suff from the filename name.
    The behavior is undefined if name does not end with the suffix suff.

value basename : string -> string
value dirname : string -> string

    Split a file name into directory name / base file name.
    concat (dirname name) (basename name) returns a file name which is
    equivalent to name.  Moreover, after setting the current directory to
    dirname name (with sys__chdir), references to basename name (which is a
    relative file name) designate the same file as name before the call to
    chdir.



14.4 format:  pretty printing

    This module implements a pretty-printing facility to format text within
    ``pretty-printing boxes''.  The pretty-printer breaks lines at specified
    break hints, and indents lines according to the box structure.


    Rule of thumb for casual users:
    use simple boxes (as obtained by open_box 0);
    use simple break hints (as obtained by print_cut () that outputs a simple
    break hint, or by print_space () that ouputs a space indicating a break
    hint);
    once a box is opened, display its material with basic printing functions
    (e.  g.  print_int and print_string);
    when the material for a box has been printed, call close_box () to close
    the box;
    at the end of your routine, evaluate print_newline () to close all
    remaining boxes and flush the pretty-printer.


    You may alternatively consider this module as providing an extension to
    the printf facility:  you can simply add pretty-printing annotations to
    your regular printf formats, as explained below in the documentation of
    the function fprintf.


    The behaviour of pretty-printing commands is unspecified if there is no
    opened pretty-printing box.  Each box opened via one of the open_
    functions below must be closed using close_box for proper formatting.
    Otherwise, some of the material printed in the boxes may not be output,


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         122


    or may be formatted incorrectly.


    In case of interactive use, the system closes all opened boxes and
    flushes all pending text (as with the print_newline function) after each
    phrase.  Each phrase is therefore executed in the initial state of the
    pretty-printer.


Boxes

value open_box : int -> unit

    open_box d opens a new pretty-printing box with offset d.  This box is
    the general purpose pretty-printing box.  Material in this box is
    displayed ``horizontal or vertical'':  break hints inside the box may
    lead to a new line, if there is no more room on the line to print the
    remainder of the box, or if a new line may lead to a new indentation
    (demonstrating the indentation of the box).  When a new line is printed
    in the box, d is added to the current indentation.

value close_box : unit -> unit

    Close the most recently opened pretty-printing box.


Formatting functions

value print_string : string -> unit

    print_string str prints str in the current box.

value print_as : int -> string -> unit

    print_as len str prints str in the current box.  The pretty-printer
    formats str as if it were of length len.

value print_int : int -> unit

    Print an integer in the current box.

value print_float : float -> unit

    Print a floating point number in the current box.

value print_char : char -> unit

    Print a character in the current box.

value print_bool : bool -> unit

    Print an boolean in the current box.


Break hints

value print_space : unit -> unit


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         123


    print_space () is used to separate items (typically to print a space
    between two words).  It indicates that the line may be split at this
    point.  It either prints one space or splits the line.  It is equivalent
    to print_break 1 0.

value print_cut : unit -> unit

    print_cut () is used to mark a good break position.  It indicates that
    the line may be split at this point.  It either prints nothing or splits
    the line.  This allows line splitting at the current point, without
    printing spaces or adding indentation.  It is equivalent to
    print_break 0 0.

value print_break : int -> int -> unit

    Insert a break hint in a pretty-printing box.  print_break nspaces offset
    indicates that the line may be split (a newline character is printed) at
    this point, if the contents of the current box does not fit on one line.
    If the line is split at that point, offset is added to the current
    indentation.  If the line is not split, nspaces spaces are printed.

value print_flush : unit -> unit

    Flush the pretty printer:  all opened boxes are closed, and all pending
    text is displayed.

value print_newline : unit -> unit

    Equivalent to print_flush followed by a new line.

value force_newline : unit -> unit

    Force a newline in the current box.  Not the normal way of
    pretty-printing, you should prefer break hints.

value print_if_newline : unit -> unit

    Execute the next formatting command if the preceding line has just been
    split.  Otherwise, ignore the next formatting command.


Margin

value set_margin : int -> unit

    set_margin d sets the value of the right margin to d (in characters):
    this value is used to detect line overflows that leads to split lines.
    Nothing happens if d is smaller than 2 or bigger than 999999999.

value get_margin : unit -> int

    Return the position of the right margin.


Maximum indentation limit

value set_max_indent : int -> unit


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         124


    set_max_indent d sets the value of the maximum indentation limit to d (in
    characters):  once this limit is reached, boxes are rejected to the left,
    if they do not fit on the current line.  Nothing happens if d is smaller
    than 2 or bigger than 999999999.

value get_max_indent : unit -> int

    Return the value of the maximum indentation limit (in characters).


Formatting depth:  maximum number of boxes allowed before ellipsis

value set_max_boxes : int -> unit

    set_max_boxes max sets the maximum number of boxes simultaneously opened.
    Material inside boxes nested deeper is printed as an ellipsis (more
    precisely as the text returned by get_ellipsis_text ()).  Nothing happens
    if max is not greater than 1.

value get_max_boxes : unit -> int

    Return the maximum number of boxes allowed before ellipsis.

value over_max_boxes : unit -> bool

    Test the maximum number of boxes allowed have already been opened.


Advanced formatting

value open_hbox : unit -> unit

    open_hbox () opens a new pretty-printing box.  This box is
    ``horizontal'':  the line is not split in this box (new lines may still
    occur inside boxes nested deeper).

value open_vbox : int -> unit

    open_vbox d opens a new pretty-printing box with offset d.  This box is
    ``vertical'':  every break hint inside this box leads to a new line.
    When a new line is printed in the box, d is added to the current
    indentation.

value open_hvbox : int -> unit

    open_hvbox d opens a new pretty-printing box with offset d.  This box is
    ``horizontal-vertical'':  it behaves as an ``horizontal'' box if it fits
    on a single line, otherwise it behaves as a ``vertical'' box.  When a new
    line is printed in the box, d is added to the current indentation.

value open_hovbox : int -> unit

    open_hovbox d opens a new pretty-printing box with offset d.  This box is
    ``horizontal or vertical'':  break hints inside this box may lead to a
    new line, if there is no more room on the line to print the remainder of
    the box.  When a new line is printed in the box, d is added to the
    current indentation.


Chapter 14.  The standard library                                          125


Tabulations

value open_tbox : unit -> unit

    Open a tabulation box.

value close_tbox : unit -> unit

    Close the most recently opened tabulation box.

value print_tbreak : int -> int -> unit

    Break hint in a tabulation box.  print_tbreak spaces offset moves the
    insertion point to the next tabulation (spaces being added to this
    position).  Nothing occurs if insertion point is already on a tabulation
    mark.  If there is no next tabulation on the line, then a newline is
    printed and the insertion point moves to the first tabulation of the box.
    If a new line is printed, offset is added to the current indentation.

value set_tab : unit -> unit

    Set a tabulation mark at the current insertion point.

value print_tab : unit -> unit

    print_tab () is equivalent to print_tbreak (0,0).


Ellipsis

value set_ellipsis_text : string -> unit

    Set the text of the ellipsis printed when too many boxes are opened (a
    single dot, ., by default).

value get_ellipsis_text : unit -> string

    Return the text of the ellipsis.


Redirecting formatter output

value set_formatter_out_channel : out_channel -> unit

    Redirect the pretty-printer output to the given channel.

value set_formatter_output_functions :
      (string -> int -> int -> unit) -> (unit -> unit) -> unit

    set_formatter_output_functions out flush redirects the pretty-printer
    output to the functions out and flush.  The out function performs the
    pretty-printer output.  It is called with a string s, a start position p,
    and a number of characters n; it is supposed to output characters p to
    p+n-1 of s.  The flush function is called whenever the pretty-printer is
    flushed using print_flush or print_newline.


Chapter 14.  The standard library                                          126


value get_formatter_output_functions :
        unit -> (string -> int -> int -> unit) * (unit -> unit)

    Return the current output functions of the pretty-printer.


Multiple formatted output

type formatter

    Abstract data type corresponding to a pretty-printer and all its
    machinery.  Defining new pretty-printers permits the output of material
    in parallel on several channels.  Parameters of the pretty-printer are
    local to the pretty-printer:  margin, maximum indentation limit, maximum
    number of boxes simultaneously opened, ellipsis, and so on, are specific
    to each pretty-printer and may be fixed independently.  A new formatter
    is obtained by calling the make_formatter function.

value std_formatter : formatter

    The standard formatter used by the formatting functions above.  It is
    defined using make_formatter with output function output stdout and
    flushing function fun () -> flush stdout.

value err_formatter : formatter

    A formatter to use with formatting functions below for output to standard
    error.  It is defined using make_formatter with output function
    output stderr and flushing function fun () -> flush stderr.

value make_formatter :
        (string -> int -> int -> unit) -> (unit -> unit) -> formatter

    make_formatter out flush returns a new formatter that writes according to
    the output function out, and flushing function flush.  Hence, a formatter
    to out channel oc is returned by
    make_formatter (output oc) (fun () -> flush oc).

value pp_open_hbox : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_open_vbox : formatter -> int -> unit
value pp_open_hvbox : formatter -> int -> unit
value pp_open_hovbox : formatter -> int -> unit
value pp_open_box : formatter -> int -> unit
value pp_close_box : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_print_string : formatter -> string -> unit
value pp_print_as : formatter -> int -> string -> unit
value pp_print_int : formatter -> int -> unit
value pp_print_float : formatter -> float -> unit
value pp_print_char : formatter -> char -> unit
value pp_print_bool : formatter -> bool -> unit
value pp_print_break : formatter -> int -> int -> unit
value pp_print_cut : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_print_space : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_force_newline : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_print_flush : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_print_newline : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_print_if_newline : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_open_tbox : formatter -> unit -> unit


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         127


value pp_close_tbox : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_print_tbreak : formatter -> int -> int -> unit
value pp_set_tab : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_print_tab : formatter -> unit -> unit
value pp_set_margin : formatter -> int -> unit
value pp_get_margin : formatter -> unit -> int
value pp_set_max_indent : formatter -> int -> unit
value pp_get_max_indent : formatter -> unit -> int
value pp_set_max_boxes : formatter -> int -> unit
value pp_get_max_boxes : formatter -> unit -> int
value pp_over_max_boxes : formatter -> unit -> bool
value pp_set_ellipsis_text : formatter -> string -> unit
value pp_get_ellipsis_text : formatter -> unit -> string
value pp_set_formatter_out_channel : formatter -> out_channel -> unit
value pp_set_formatter_output_functions : formatter ->
        (string -> int -> int -> unit) -> (unit -> unit) -> unit
value pp_get_formatter_output_functions :
        formatter -> unit -> (string -> int -> int -> unit) * (unit -> unit)

    The basic functions to use with formatters.  These functions are the
    basic ones:  usual functions operating on the standard formatter are
    defined via partial evaluation of these primitives.  For instance,
    print_string is equal to pp_print_string std_formatter.

value fprintf : formatter -> ('a, formatter, unit) format -> 'a

    fprintf ff format arg1 ... argN formats the arguments arg1 to argN
    according to the format string format, and outputs the resulting string
    on the formatter ff.  The format is a character string which contains
    three types of objects:  plain characters and conversion specifications
    as specified in the printf module, and pretty-printing indications.  The
    pretty-printing indication characters are introduced by a @ character,
    and their meanings are:
    [:  open a pretty-printing box.  The type and offset of the box may be
    optionally specified with the following syntax:  the < character,
    followed by an optional box type indication, then an optional integer
    offset, and the closing > character.  Box type is one of h, v, hv, or
    hov, which stand respectively for an horizontal, vertical,
    ``horizontal-vertical'' and ``horizontal or vertical'' box.
    ]:  close the most recently opened pretty-printing box.
    ,:  output a good break as with print_cut ().
     :  output a space, as with print_space ().
    \n:  force a newline, as with force_newline ().
    ;:  output a good break as with print_break.  The nspaces and offset
    parameters of the break may be optionally specified with the following
    syntax:  the < character, followed by an integer nspaces value, then an
    integer offset, and a closing > character.
    .:  flush the pretty printer as with print_newline ().
    @:  a plain @ character.

value printf : ('a, formatter, unit) format -> 'a

    Same as fprintf, but output on std_formatter.

value eprintf: ('a, formatter, unit) format -> 'a

    Same as fprintf, but output on err_formatter.


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         128


14.5 gc:  memory management control and statistics

type stat = {
  minor_words : int;
  promoted_words : int;
  major_words : int;
  minor_collections : int;
  major_collections : int;
  heap_words : int;
  heap_chunks : int;
  live_words : int;
  live_blocks : int;
  free_words : int;
  free_blocks : int;
  largest_words : int;
  fragments : int
}

    The memory management counters are returned in a stat record.  All the
    numbers are computed since the start of the program.  The fields of this
    record are:
    minor_words Number of words allocated in the minor heap.
    promoted_words Number of words allocated in the minor heap that survived
    a minor collection and were moved to the major heap.
    major_words Number of words allocated in the major heap, including the
    promoted words.
    minor_collections Number of minor collections.
    major_collections Number of major collection cycles, not counting the
    current cycle.
    heap_words Total size of the major heap, in words.
    heap_chunks Number of times the major heap size was increased.
    live_words Number of words of live data in the major heap, including the
    header words.
    live_blocks Number of live objects in the major heap.
    free_words Number of words in the free list.
    free_blocks Number of objects in the free list.
    largest_words Size (in words) of the largest object in the free list.
    fragments Number of wasted words due to fragmentation.  These are 1-words
    free blocks placed between two live objects.  They cannot be inserted in
    the free list, thus they are not available for allocation.
    The total amount of memory allocated by the program is (in words)
    minor_words + major_words - promoted_words.  Multiply by the word size (4
    on a 32-bit machine, 8 on a 64-bit machine) to get the number of bytes.

type control = {
  mutable minor_heap_size : int;
  mutable major_heap_increment : int;
  mutable space_overhead : int;
  mutable verbose : bool
}

    The GC parameters are given as a control record.  The fields are:
    minor_heap_size The size (in words) of the minor heap.  Changing this
    parameter will trigger a minor collection.
    major_heap_increment The minimum number of words to add to the major heap
    when increasing it.
    space_overhead The major GC speed is computed from this parameter.  This
    is the percentage of heap space that will be "wasted" because the GC does


Chapter 14.  The standard library                                          129


    not immediatly collect unreachable objects.  The GC will work more (use
    more CPU time and collect objects more eagerly) if space_overhead is
    smaller.  The computation of the GC speed assumes that the amount of live
    data is constant.
    verbose This flag controls the GC messages on standard error output.

value stat : unit -> stat

    Return the current values of the memory management counters in a stat
    record.

value print_stat : io__out_channel -> unit

    Print the current values of the memory management counters (in
    human-readable form) into the channel argument.

value get : unit -> control

    Return the current values of the GC parameters in a control record.

value set : control -> unit

    set r changes the GC parameters according to the control record r.  The
    normal usage is:


           let r = gc__get () in    (* Get the current parameters. *)
             r.verbose <- true;     (* Change some of them. *)
             gc__set r              (* Set the new values. *)


value minor : unit -> unit

    Trigger a minor collection.

value major : unit -> unit

    Finish the current major collection cycle.

value full_major : unit -> unit

    Finish the current major collection cycle and perform a complete new
    cycle.  This will collect all currently unreachable objects.



14.6 genlex:  a generic lexical analyzer

    This module implements a simple ``standard'' lexical analyzer, presented
    as a function from character streams to token streams.  It implements
    roughly the lexical conventions of Caml, but is parameterized by the set
    of keywords of your language.

type token =
    Kwd of string
  | Ident of string
  | Int of int
  | Float of float


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         130


  | String of string
  | Char of char

    The type of tokens.  The lexical classes are:  Int and Float for integer
    and floating-point numbers; String for string literals, enclosed in
    double quotes; Char for character literals, enclosed in backquotes; Ident
    for identifiers (either sequences of letters, digits, underscores and
    quotes, or sequences of ``operator characters'' such as +, *, etc); and
    Kwd for keywords (either identifiers or single ``special characters''
    such as (, }, etc).

value make_lexer: string list -> (char stream -> token stream)

    Construct the lexer function.  The first argument is the list of
    keywords.  An identifier s is returned as Kwd s if s belongs to this
    list, and as Ident s otherwise.  A special character s is returned as
    Kwd s if s belongs to this list, and cause a lexical error (exception
    Parse_error) otherwise.  Blanks and newlines are skipped.  Comments
    delimited by (* and *) are skipped as well, and can be nested.


    Example:  a lexer suitable for a desk calculator is obtained by


               let lexer = make_lexer ["+";"-";"*";"/";"let";"="; "("; ")"]


    The associated parser would be a function from token stream to, for
    instance, int, and would have rules such as:


               let parse_expr = function
                      [< 'Int n >] -> n
                    | [< 'Kwd "("; parse_expr n; 'Kwd ")" >] -> n
                    | [< parse_expr n1; (parse_remainder n1) n2 >] -> n2
               and parse_remainder n1 = function
                      [< 'Kwd "+"; parse_expr n2 >] -> n1+n2
                    | ...




14.7 hashtbl:  hash tables and hash functions

    Hash tables are hashed association tables, with in-place modification.

type ('a, 'b) t

    The type of hash tables from type 'a to type 'b.

value new : int -> ('a,'b) t

    new n creates a new, empty hash table, with initial size n.  The table
    grows as needed, so n is just an initial guess.  Better results are said
    to be achieved when n is a prime number.  Raise
    Invalid_argument "hashtbl__new" if n is less than 1.

value clear : ('a, 'b) t -> unit


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         131


    Empty a hash table.

value add : ('a, 'b) t -> 'a -> 'b -> unit

    add tbl x y adds a binding of x to y in table tbl.  Previous bindings for
    x are not removed, but simply hidden.  That is, after performing
    remove tbl x, the previous binding for x, if any, is restored.  (This is
    the semantics of association lists.)

value find : ('a, 'b) t -> 'a -> 'b

    find tbl x returns the current binding of x in tbl, or raises Not_found
    if no such binding exists.

value find_all : ('a, 'b) t -> 'a -> 'b list

    find_all tbl x returns the list of all data associated with x in tbl.
    The current binding is returned first, then the previous bindings, in
    reverse order of introduction in the table.

value remove : ('a, 'b) t -> 'a -> unit

    remove tbl x removes the current binding of x in tbl, restoring the
    previous binding if it exists.  It does nothing if x is not bound in tbl.

value do_table : ('a -> 'b -> unit) -> ('a, 'b) t -> unit

    do_table f tbl applies f to all bindings in table tbl, discarding all the
    results.  f receives the key as first argument, and the associated value
    as second argument.  Each binding is presented exactly once to f.  The
    order in which the bindings are passed to f is unpredictable, except that
    successive bindings for the same key are presented in reverse
    chronological order (most recent first).

value do_table_rev : ('a -> 'b -> unit) -> ('a, 'b) t -> unit

    Same as do_table, except that successive bindings for the same key are
    presented in chronological order (oldest first).


The polymorphic hash primitive

value hash : 'a -> int

    hash x associates a positive integer to any value of any type.  It is
    guaranteed that if x = y, then hash x = hash y.  Moreover, hash always
    terminates, even on cyclic structures.

value hash_param : int -> int -> 'a -> int

    hash_param n m x computes a hash value for x, with the same properties as
    for hash.  The two extra parameters n and m give more precise control
    over hashing.  Hashing performs a depth-first, right-to-left traversal of
    the structure x, stopping after n meaningful nodes were encountered, or m
    nodes, meaningful or not, were encountered.  Meaningful nodes are:
    integers; floating-point numbers; strings; characters; booleans; and
    constant constructors.  Larger values of m and n means that more nodes
    are taken into account to compute the final hash value, and therefore


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         132


    collisions are less likely to happen.  However, hashing takes longer.
    The parameters m and n govern the tradeoff between accuracy and speed.



14.8 lexing:  the run-time library for lexers generated by camllex

Lexer buffers

type lexbuf =
  { refill_buff : lexbuf -> unit;
    lex_buffer : string;
    mutable lex_abs_pos : int;
    mutable lex_start_pos : int;
    mutable lex_curr_pos : int;
    mutable lex_last_pos : int;
    mutable lex_last_action : lexbuf -> obj }

    The type of lexer buffers.  A lexer buffer is the argument passed to the
    scanning functions defined by the generated scanners.  The lexer buffer
    holds the current state of the scanner, plus a function to refill the
    buffer from the input.

value create_lexer_channel : in_channel -> lexbuf

    Create a lexer buffer on the given input channel.
    create_lexer_channel inchan returns a lexer buffer which reads from the
    input channel inchan, at the current reading position.

value create_lexer_string : string -> lexbuf

    Create a lexer buffer which reads from the given string.  Reading starts
    from the first character in the string.  An end-of-input condition is
    generated when the end of the string is reached.

value create_lexer : (string -> int -> int) -> lexbuf

    Create a lexer buffer with the given function as its reading method.
    When the scanner needs more characters, it will call the given function,
    giving it a character string s and a character count n.  The function
    should put n characters or less in s, starting at character number 0, and
    return the number of characters provided.  A return value of 0 means end
    of input.


Functions for lexer semantic actions

    The following functions can be called from the semantic actions of lexer
    definitions (the ML code enclosed in braces that computes the value
    returned by lexing functions).  They give access to the character string
    matched by the regular expression associated with the semantic action.
    These functions must be applied to the argument lexbuf, which, in the
    code generated by camllex, is bound to the lexer buffer passed to the
    parsing function.

value get_lexeme : lexbuf -> string

    get_lexeme lexbuf returns the string matched by the regular expression.


Chapter 14.  The standard library                                          133


value get_lexeme_char : lexbuf -> int -> char

    get_lexeme_char lexbuf i returns character number i in the matched
    string.

value get_lexeme_start : lexbuf -> int

    get_lexeme_start lexbuf returns the position in the input stream of the
    first character of the matched string.  The first character of the stream
    has position 0.

value get_lexeme_end : lexbuf -> int

    get_lexeme_end lexbuf returns the position in the input stream of the
    character following the last character of the matched string.  The first
    character of the stream has position 0.



14.9 map:  association tables over ordered types

    This module implements applicative association tables, also known as
    finite maps or dictionaries, given a total ordering function over the
    keys.  All operations over maps are purely applicative (no side-effects).
    The implementation uses balanced binary trees, and therefore searching
    and insertion take time logarithmic in the size of the map.

type ('a, 'b) t

    The type of maps from type 'a to type 'b.

value empty: ('a -> 'a -> int) -> ('a, 'b) t

    The empty map.  The argument is a total ordering function over the set
    elements.  This is a two-argument function f such that f e1 e2 is zero if
    the elements e1 and e2 are equal, f e1 e2 is strictly negative if e1 is
    smaller than e2, and f e1 e2 is strictly positive if e1 is greater than
    e2.  Examples:  a suitable ordering function for type int is prefix -.
    You can also use the generic structural comparison function eq__compare.

value add: 'a -> 'b -> ('a, 'b) t -> ('a, 'b) t

    add x y m returns a map containing the same bindings as m, plus a binding
    of x to y.  Previous bindings for x in m are not removed, but simply
    hidden:  they reappear after performing a remove operation.  (This is the
    semantics of association lists.)

value find:'a -> ('a, 'b) t -> 'b

    find x m returns the current binding of x in m, or raises Not_found if no
    such binding exists.

value remove: 'a -> ('a, 'b) t -> ('a, 'b) t

    remove x m returns a map containing the same bindings as m except the
    current binding for x.  The previous binding for x is restored if it
    exists.  m is returned unchanged if x is not bound in m.


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         134


value iter: ('a -> 'b -> unit) -> ('a, 'b) t -> unit

    iter f m applies f to all bindings in map m, discarding the results.  f
    receives the key as first argument, and the associated value as second
    argument.  The order in which the bindings are passed to f is
    unspecified.  Only current bindings are presented to f:  bindings hidden
    by more recent bindings are not passed to f.



14.10 parsing:  the run-time library for parsers generated by camlyacc

value symbol_start : unit -> int
value symbol_end : unit -> int

    symbol_start and symbol_end are to be called in the action part of a
    grammar rule only.  They return the position of the string that matches
    the left-hand side of the rule:  symbol_start() returns the position of
    the first character; symbol_end() returns the position of the last
    character, plus one.  The first character in a file is at position 0.

value rhs_start: int -> int
value rhs_end: int -> int

    Same as symbol_start and symbol_end above, but return the position of the
    string matching the nth item on the right-hand side of the rule, where n
    is the integer parameter to lhs_start and lhs_end.  n is 1 for the
    leftmost item.

value clear_parser : unit -> unit

    Empty the parser stack.  Call it just after a parsing function has
    returned, to remove all pointers from the parser stack to structures that
    were built by semantic actions during parsing.  This is optional, but
    lowers the memory requirements of the programs.

exception Parse_error

    Raised when a parser encounters a syntax error.



14.11 printexc:  a catch-all exception handler

value f: ('a -> 'b) -> 'a -> 'b

    printexc__f fn x applies fn to x and returns the result.  If the
    evaluation of fn x raises any exception, the name of the exception is
    printed on standard error output, and the programs aborts with exit code
    2.  Typical use is printexc__f main (), where main, with type unit->unit,
    is the entry point of a standalone program, to catch and print stray
    exceptions.  For printexc__f to work properly, the program must have been
    linked with the -g option.



14.12 printf:  formatting printing functions

type ('a, 'b, 'c) format


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         135


    The type of format strings.  'a is the type of the parameters of the
    string, 'c is the result type for the printf-style function, and 'b is
    the type of the first argument given to %a and %t printing functions.

value fprintf: out_channel -> ('a, out_channel, unit) format -> 'a

    fprintf outchan format arg1 ... argN formats the arguments arg1 to argN
    according to the format string format, and outputs the resulting string
    on the channel outchan.  The format is a character string which contains
    two types of objects:  plain characters, which are simply copied to the
    output channel, and conversion specifications, each of which causes
    conversion and printing of one argument.  Conversion specifications
    consist in the % character, followed by optional flags and field widths,
    followed by one conversion character.  The conversion characters and
    their meanings are:
    d or i:  convert an integer argument to signed decimal
    u:  convert an integer argument to unsigned decimal
    x:  convert an integer argument to unsigned hexadecimal, using lowercase
    letters.
    X: convert an integer argument to unsigned hexadecimal, using uppercase
    letters.
    s:  insert a string argument
    c:  insert a character argument
    f:  convert a floating-point argument to decimal notation, in the style
    dddd.ddd
    e or E: convert a floating-point argument to decimal notation, in the
    style d.ddd e+-dd (mantissa and exponent)
    g or G: convert a floating-point argument to decimal notation, in style f
    or e, E (whichever is more compact)
    b:  convert a boolean argument to the string true or false
    a:  user-defined printer.  Takes two arguments and apply the first one to
    outchan (the current output channel) and to the second argument.  The
    first argument must therefore have type out_channel -> 'b -> unit and the
    second 'b.  The output produced by the function is therefore inserted in
    the output of fprintf at the current point.
    t:  same as %a, but takes only one argument (with type
    out_channel -> unit) and apply it to outchan.
    Refer to the C library printf function for the meaning of flags and field
    width specifiers.  If too few arguments are provided, printing stops just
    before converting the first missing argument.

value printf: ('a, out_channel, unit) format -> 'a

    Same as fprintf, but output on std_out.

value eprintf: ('a, out_channel, unit) format -> 'a

    Same as fprintf, but output on std_err.

value sprintf: ('a, unit, string) format -> 'a

    Same as fprintf, except that the result of the formatting is returned as
    a string instead of being written on a channel.

value fprint: out_channel -> string -> unit

    Print the given string on the given output channel, without any
    formatting.  This is the same function as output_string of module io.


Chapter 14.  The standard library                                          136


value print: string -> unit

    Print the given string on std_out, without any formatting.  This is the
    same function as print_string of module io.

value eprint: string -> unit

    Print the given string on std_err, without any formatting.  This is the
    same function as prerr_string of module io.



14.13 queue:  queues

    This module implements queues (FIFOs), with in-place modification.

type 'a t

    The type of queues containing elements of type 'a.

exception Empty

    Raised when take is applied to an empty queue.

value new: unit -> 'a t

    Return a new queue, initially empty.

value add: 'a -> 'a t -> unit

    add x q adds the element x at the end of the queue q.

value take: 'a t -> 'a

    take q removes and returns the first element in queue q, or raises Empty
    if the queue is empty.

value peek: 'a t -> 'a

    peek q returns the first element in queue q, without removing it from the
    queue, or raises Empty if the queue is empty.

value clear : 'a t -> unit

    Discard all elements from a queue.

value length: 'a t -> int

    Return the number of elements in a queue.

value iter: ('a -> unit) -> 'a t -> unit

    iter f q applies f in turn to all elements of q, from the least recently
    entered to the most recently entered.  The queue itself is unchanged.


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         137


14.14 random:  pseudo-random number generator

value init : int -> unit

    Initialize the generator, using the argument as a seed.  The same seed
    will always yield the same sequence of numbers.

value full_init : int vect -> unit

    Same as init but takes more data as seed.  It is not useful to give more
    than 55 integers.

value int : int -> int

    random__int bound returns a random number between 0 (inclusive) and bound
                                                           30
    (exclusive).  bound must be positive and smaller than 2  .

value float : float -> float

    random__float bound returns a random number between 0 (inclusive) and
    bound (exclusive).



14.15 set:  sets over ordered types

    This module implements the set data structure, given a total ordering
    function over the set elements.  All operations over sets are purely
    applicative (no side-effects).  The implementation uses balanced binary
    trees, and is therefore reasonably efficient:  insertion and membership
    take time logarithmic in the size of the set, for instance.

type 'a t

    The type of sets containing elements of type 'a.

value empty: ('a -> 'a -> int) -> 'a t

    The empty set.  The argument is a total ordering function over the set
    elements.  This is a two-argument function f such that f e1 e2 is zero if
    the elements e1 and e2 are equal, f e1 e2 is strictly negative if e1 is
    smaller than e2, and f e1 e2 is strictly positive if e1 is greater than
    e2.  Examples:  a suitable ordering function for type int is prefix -.
    You can also use the generic structural comparison function eq__compare.

value is_empty: 'a t -> bool

    Test whether a set is empty or not.

value mem: 'a -> 'a t -> bool

    mem x s tests whether x belongs to the set s.

value add: 'a -> 'a t -> 'a t

    add x s returns a set containing all elements of s, plus x.  If x was
    already in s, s is returned unchanged.


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         138


value remove: 'a -> 'a t -> 'a t

    remove x s returns a set containing all elements of s, except x.  If x
    was not in s, s is returned unchanged.

value union: 'a t -> 'a t -> 'a t
value inter: 'a t -> 'a t -> 'a t
value diff: 'a t -> 'a t -> 'a t

    Union, intersection and set difference.

value equal: 'a t -> 'a t -> bool

    equal s1 s2 tests whether the sets s1 and s2 are equal, that is, contain
    the same elements.

value compare: 'a t -> 'a t -> int

    Total ordering between sets.  Can be used as the ordering function for
    doing sets of sets.

value elements: 'a t -> 'a list

    Return the list of all elements of the given set.  The elements appear in
    the list in some non-specified order.

value iter: ('a -> unit) -> 'a t -> unit

    iter f s applies f in turn to all elements of s, and discards the
    results.  The elements of s are presented to f in a non-specified order.

value fold: ('a -> 'b -> 'b) -> 'a t -> 'b -> 'b

    fold f s a computes (f xN ... (f x2 (f x1 a))...), where x1 ... xN are
    the elements of s.  The order in which elements of s are presented to f
    is not specified.

value choose: 'a t -> 'a

    Return one element of the given set, or raise Not_found if the set is
    empty.  Which element is chosen is not specified, but equal elements will
    be chosen for equal sets.



14.16 sort:  sorting and merging lists

value sort : ('a -> 'a -> bool) -> 'a list -> 'a list

    Sort a list in increasing order according to an ordering predicate.  The
    predicate should return true if its first argument is less than or equal
    to its second argument.

value merge : ('a -> 'a -> bool) -> 'a list -> 'a list -> 'a list

    Merge two lists according to the given predicate.  Assuming the two
    argument lists are sorted according to the predicate, merge returns a


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         139


    sorted list containing the elements from the two lists.  The behavior is
    undefined if the two argument lists were not sorted.



14.17 stack:  stacks

    This module implements stacks (LIFOs), with in-place modification.

type 'a t

    The type of stacks containing elements of type 'a.

exception Empty

    Raised when pop is applied to an empty stack.

value new: unit -> 'a t

    Return a new stack, initially empty.

value push: 'a -> 'a t -> unit

    push x s adds the element x at the top of stack s.

value pop: 'a t -> 'a

    pop s removes and returns the topmost element in stack s, or raises Empty
    if the stack is empty.

value clear : 'a t -> unit

    Discard all elements from a stack.

value length: 'a t -> int

    Return the number of elements in a stack.

value iter: ('a -> unit) -> 'a t -> unit

    iter f s applies f in turn to all elements of s, from the element at the
    top of the stack to the element at the bottom of the stack.  The stack
    itself is unchanged.



14.18 sys:  system interface

    This module provides a simple interface to the operating system.

exception Sys_error of string

    Raised by some functions in the sys and io modules, when the underlying
    system calls fail.  The argument to Sys_error is a string describing the
    error.  The texts of the error messages are implementation-dependent, and
    should not be relied upon to catch specific system errors.


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         140


value command_line : string vect

    The command line arguments given to the process.  The first element is
    the command name used to invoke the program.

value interactive: bool

    True if we're running under the toplevel system.  False if we're running
    as a standalone program.

type file_perm == int
value s_irusr : file_perm
value s_iwusr : file_perm
value s_ixusr : file_perm
value s_irgrp : file_perm
value s_iwgrp : file_perm
value s_ixgrp : file_perm
value s_iroth : file_perm
value s_iwoth : file_perm
value s_ixoth : file_perm
value s_isuid : file_perm
value s_isgid : file_perm
value s_irall : file_perm
value s_iwall : file_perm
value s_ixall : file_perm

    Access permissions for files.  r is reading permission, w is writing
    permission, x is execution permission.  usr means permissions for the
    user owning the file, grp for the group owning the file, oth for others.
    isuid and isgid are for set-user-id and set-group-id files, respectively.
    The remaining are combinations of the permissions above.

type open_flag =
    O_RDONLY                       (* open read-only *)
  | O_WRONLY                       (* open write-only *)
  | O_RDWR                         (* open for reading and writing *)
  | O_APPEND                       (* open for appending *)
  | O_CREAT                        (* create the file if nonexistent *)
  | O_TRUNC                        (* truncate the file to 0 if it exists *)
  | O_EXCL                         (* fails if the file exists *)
  | O_BINARY                       (* open in binary mode *)
  | O_TEXT                         (* open in text mode *)

    The commands for open.

value exit : int -> 'a

    Terminate the program and return the given status code to the operating
    system.  In contrast with the function exit from module io, this exit
    function does not flush the standard output and standard error channels.

value open : string -> open_flag list -> file_perm -> int

    Open a file.  The second argument is the opening mode.  The third
    argument is the permissions to use if the file must be created.  The
    result is a file descriptor opened on the file.


Chapter 14.   The standard library                                         141


value close : int -> unit

    Close a file descriptor.

value remove : string -> unit

    Remove the given file name from the file system.

value rename : string -> string -> unit

    Rename a file.  The first argument is the old name and the second is the
    new name.

value getenv : string -> string

    Return the value associated to a variable in the process environment.
    Raise Not_found if the variable is unbound.

value chdir : string -> unit

    Change the current working directory of the process.  Note that there is
    no easy way of getting the current working directory from the operating
    system.

value system_command : string -> int

    Execute the given shell command and return its exit code.

value time : unit -> float

    Return the processor time, in seconds, used by the program since the
    beginning of execution.

exception Break

    Exception Break is raised on user interrupt if catch_break is on.

value catch_break : bool -> unit

    catch_break governs whether user interrupt terminates the program or
    raises the Break exception.  Call catch_break true to enable raising
    Break, and catch_break false to let the system terminate the program on
    user interrupt.











Chapter 15



The graphics library



This chapter describes the portable graphics primitives that come standard in
the implementation of Caml Light on micro-computers.

Unix: On Unix workstations running the X11 windows system, an implementation
      of the graphics primitives is available in the directory
      contrib/libgraph in the distribution.  See the file README in this
      directory for information on building and using camlgraph, a toplevel
      system that includes the graphics primitives, and linking standalone
      programs with the library.  Drawing takes place in a separate window
      that is created when open_graph is called.

Mac:  The graphics primitive are available from the standalone application
      that runs the toplevel system.  They are not available from programs
      compiled by camlc and run under the MPW shell.  Drawing takes place in
      a separate window, that can be made visible with the ``Show graphics
      window'' menu entry.

PC:   The graphics primitive are available from the Windows application that
      runs the toplevel system.  They are not available from programs
      compiled by camlc and run in a DOS command window.  Drawing takes place
      in a separate window.

  The screen coordinates are interpreted as shown in the figure below.  Notice
that the coordinate system used is the same as in mathematics:  y increases
from the bottom of the screen to the top of the screen, and angles are
measured counterclockwisey(in degrees).  Drawing is clipped to the screen.
                          |
                         -------------------------
                size_y()  |                      |
                          |               Screen |
                          |                      |
                          |                      |
                          |      |pixel at (x,y) |
                       y ---------
                          |      |               |
                          |      |               |
                          |      |               |
                          |      |               |
                                 |               |
                        ------------------------------
                          |      |               |     x
                          |     x            size_x()

Here are the graphics mode specifications supported by open_graph on the
various implementations of this library.



                                     142


Chapter 15.  The graphics library                                          143


Unix: The argument to open_graph has the format "display-name geometry",
      where display-name is the name of the X-windows display to connect to,
      and geometry is a standard X-windows geometry specification.  The two
      components are separated by a space.  Either can be omitted, or both.
      Examples:


      open_graph "foo:0"
          connects to the display foo:0 and creates a window with the default
          geometry

      open_graph "foo:0 300x100+50-0"
          connects to the display foo:0 and creates a window 300 pixels wide
          by 100 pixels tall, at location (50,0)

      open_graph " 300x100+50-0"
          connects to the default display and creates a window 300 pixels
          wide by 100 pixels tall, at location (50,0)

      open_graph ""
          connects to the default display and creates a window with the
          default geometry.


Mac:  The argument to open_graph is ignored.

PC:   The argument to open_graph has the format "widthxheight" or
      "widthxheight+x+y", where width and height are the initial dimensions
      of the graphics windows, and x and y are the position of the upper-left
      corner of the graphics window.  If omitted, (width,height) default to
      (600,400) and (x,y) default to (10, 10).


15.1 graphics:  machine-independent graphics primitives

exception Graphic_failure of string

    Raised by the functions below when they encounter an error.


Initializations

value open_graph: string -> unit

    Show the graphics window or switch the screen to graphic mode.  The
    graphics window is cleared.  The string argument is used to pass optional
    information on the desired graphics mode, the graphics window size, and
    so on.  Its interpretation is implementation-dependent.  If the empty
    string is given, a sensible default is selected.

value close_graph: unit -> unit

    Delete the graphics window or switch the screen back to text mode.

value clear_graph : unit -> unit

    Erase the graphics window.


Chapter 15.   The graphics library                                         144


value size_x : unit -> int
value size_y : unit -> int

    Return the size of the graphics window.  Coordinates of the screen pixels
    range over 0 .. size_x()-1 and 0 .. size_y()-1.  Drawings outside of this
    rectangle are clipped, without causing an error.  The origin (0,0) is at
    the lower left corner.


Colors

type color == int

    A color is specified by its R, G, B components.  Each component is in the
    range 0..255.  The three components are packed in an int:  0xRRGGBB,
    where RR are the two hexadecimal digits for the red component, GG for the
    green component, BB for the blue component.

value rgb: int -> int -> int -> color

    rgb r g b returns the integer encoding the color with red component r,
    green component g, and blue component b.  r, g and b are in the range
    0..255.

value set_color : color -> unit

    Set the current drawing color.

value black : color
value white : color
value red : color
value green : color
value blue : color
value yellow : color
value cyan : color
value magenta : color

    Some predefined colors.

value background: color
value foreground: color

    Default background and foreground colors (usually, either black
    foreground on a white background or white foreground on a black
    background).  clear_graph fills the screen with the background color.
    The initial drawing color is foreground.


Point and line drawing

value plot : int -> int -> unit

    Plot the given point with the current drawing color.

value point_color : int -> int -> color

    Return the color of the given point.


Chapter 15.  The graphics library                                          145


value moveto : int -> int -> unit

    Position the current point.

value current_point : unit -> int * int

    Return the position of the current point.

value lineto : int -> int -> unit

    Draw a line with endpoints the current point and the given point, and
    move the current point to the given point.

value draw_arc : int -> int -> int -> int -> int -> int -> unit

    draw_arc x y rx ry a1 a2 draws an elliptical arc with center x,y,
    horizontal radius rx, vertical radius ry, from angle a1 to angle a2 (in
    degrees).  The current point is unchanged.

value draw_ellipse : int -> int -> int -> int -> unit

    draw_ellipse x y rx ry draws an ellipse with center x,y, horizontal
    radius rx and vertical radius ry.  The current point is unchanged.

value draw_circle : int -> int -> int -> unit

    draw_circle x y r draws a circle with center x,y and radius r.  The
    current point is unchanged.

value set_line_width : int -> unit

    Set the width of points and lines drawn with the functions above.  Under
    X Windows, set_line_width 0 selects a width of 1 pixel and a faster, but
    less precise drawing algorithm than the one used when set_line_width 1 is
    specified.


Text drawing

value draw_char : char -> unit
value draw_string : string -> unit

    Draw a character or a character string with lower left corner at current
    position.  After drawing, the current position is set to the lower right
    corner of the text drawn.

value set_font : string -> unit
value set_text_size : int -> unit

    Set the font and character size used for drawing text.  The
    interpretation of the arguments to set_font and set_text_size is
    implementation-dependent.

value text_size : string -> int * int

    Return the dimensions of the given text, if it were drawn with the
    current font and size.


Chapter 15.   The graphics library                                         146


Filling

value fill_rect : int -> int -> int -> int -> unit

    fill_rect x y w h fills the rectangle with lower left corner at x,y,
    width w and heigth h, with the current color.

value fill_poly : (int * int) vect -> unit

    Fill the given polygon with the current color.  The array contains the
    coordinates of the vertices of the polygon.

value fill_arc : int -> int -> int -> int -> int -> int -> unit

    Fill an elliptical pie slice with the current color.  The parameters are
    the same as for draw_arc.

value fill_ellipse : int -> int -> int -> int -> unit

    Fill an ellipse with the current color.  The parameters are the same as
    for draw_ellipse.

value fill_circle : int -> int -> int -> unit

    Fill a circle with the current color.  The parameters are the same as for
    draw_circle.


Images

type image

    The abstract type for images, in internal representation.  Externally,
    images are represented as matrices of colors.

value transp : color

    In matrices of colors, this color represent a ``transparent'' point:
    when drawing the corresponding image, all pixels on the screen
    corresponding to a transparent pixel in the image will not be modified,
    while other points will be set to the color of the corresponding point in
    the image.  This allows superimposing an image over an existing
    background.

value make_image : color vect vect -> image

    Convert the given color matrix to an image.  Each sub-array represents
    one horizontal line.  All sub-arrays must have the same length;
    otherwise, exception Graphic_failure is raised.

value dump_image : image -> color vect vect

    Convert an image to a color matrix.

value draw_image : image -> int -> int -> unit

    Draw the given image with lower left corner at the given point.


Chapter 15.  The graphics library                                          147


value get_image : int -> int -> int -> int -> image

    Capture the contents of a rectangle on the screen as an image.  The
    parameters are the same as for fill_rect.

value create_image : int -> int -> image

    create_image w h returns a new image w pixels wide and h pixels tall, to
    be used in conjunction with blit_image.  The initial image contents are
    random.

value blit_image : image -> int -> int -> unit

    blit_image img x y copies screen pixels into the image img, modifying img
    in-place.  The pixels copied are those inside the rectangle with lower
    left corner at x,y, and width and height equal to those of the image.


Mouse and keyboard events

type status =
  { mouse_x : int;              (* X coordinate of the mouse *)
    mouse_y : int;              (* Y coordinate of the mouse *)
    button : bool;              (* true if a mouse button is pressed *)
    keypressed : bool;          (* true if a key has been pressed *)
    key : char }                (* the character for the key pressed *)

    To report events.

type event =
    Button_down                 (* A mouse button is pressed *)
  | Button_up                   (* A mouse button is released *)
  | Key_pressed                 (* A key is pressed *)
  | Mouse_motion                (* The mouse is moved *)
  | Poll                        (* Don't wait; return immediately *)

    To specify events to wait for.

value wait_next_event : event list -> status

    Wait until one of the events specified in the given event list occurs,
    and return the status of the mouse and keyboard at that time.  If Poll is
    given in the event list, return immediately with the current status.  If
    the mouse cursor is outside of the graphics window, the mouse_x and
    mouse_y fields of the event are outside the range
    0..size_x()-1, 0..size_y()-1.  Keypresses are queued, and dequeued one by
    one when the Key_pressed event is specified.


Mouse and keyboard polling

value mouse_pos : unit -> int * int

    Return the position of the mouse cursor, relative to the graphics window.
    If the mouse cursor is outside of the graphics window, mouse_pos()
    returns a point outside of the range 0..size_x()-1, 0..size_y()-1.


Chapter 15.   The graphics library                                         148


value button_down : unit -> bool

    Return true if the mouse button is pressed, false otherwise.

value read_key : unit -> char

    Wait for a key to be pressed, and return the corresponding character.
    Keypresses are queued.

value key_pressed : unit -> bool

    Return true if a keypress is available; that is, if read_key would not
    block.


Sound

value sound : int -> int -> unit

    sound freq dur plays a sound at frequency freq (in hertz) for a duration
    dur (in milliseconds).  On the Macintosh, the frequency is rounded to the
    nearest note in the equal-tempered scale.











Chapter 16



The unix library:  Unix system calls



The unix library (distributed in contrib/libunix) makes many Unix system calls
and system-related library functions available to Caml Light programs.  This
chapter describes briefly the functions provided.  Refer to sections 2 and 3
of the Unix manual for more details on the behavior of these functions.
  Not all functions are provided by all Unix variants.  If some functions are
not available, they will raise Invalid_arg when called.
  Programs that use the unix library must be linked in ``custom runtime''
mode, as follows:

        camlc -custom other options unix.zo other files -lunix

For interactive use of the unix library, run camllight camlunix.

Mac:  This library is not available.

PC:   This library is not available.


16.1 unix:  interface to the Unix system

Error report

type error =
    ENOERR
  | EPERM               (* Not owner *)
  | ENOENT              (* No such file or directory *)
  | ESRCH               (* No such process *)
  | EINTR               (* Interrupted system call *)
  | EIO                 (* I/O error *)
  | ENXIO               (* No such device or address *)
  | E2BIG               (* Arg list too long *)
  | ENOEXEC             (* Exec format error *)
  | EBADF               (* Bad file number *)
  | ECHILD              (* No children *)
  | EAGAIN              (* No more processes *)
  | ENOMEM              (* Not enough core *)
  | EACCES              (* Permission denied *)
  | EFAULT              (* Bad address *)
  | ENOTBLK             (* Block device required *)
  | EBUSY               (* Mount device busy *)
  | EEXIST              (* File exists *)
  | EXDEV               (* Cross-device link *)
  | ENODEV              (* No such device *)


                                     149


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         150


  | ENOTDIR             (* Not a directory*)
  | EISDIR              (* Is a directory *)
  | EINVAL              (* Invalid argument *)
  | ENFILE              (* File table overflow *)
  | EMFILE              (* Too many open files *)
  | ENOTTY              (* Not a typewriter *)
  | ETXTBSY             (* Text file busy *)
  | EFBIG               (* File too large *)
  | ENOSPC              (* No space left on device *)
  | ESPIPE              (* Illegal seek *)
  | EROFS               (* Read-only file system *)
  | EMLINK              (* Too many links *)
  | EPIPE               (* Broken pipe *)
  | EDOM                (* Argument too large *)
  | ERANGE              (* Result too large *)
  | EWOULDBLOCK         (* Operation would block *)
  | EINPROGRESS         (* Operation now in progress *)
  | EALREADY            (* Operation already in progress *)
  | ENOTSOCK            (* Socket operation on non-socket *)
  | EDESTADDRREQ        (* Destination address required *)
  | EMSGSIZE            (* Message too long *)
  | EPROTOTYPE          (* Protocol wrong type for socket *)
  | ENOPROTOOPT         (* Protocol not available *)
  | EPROTONOSUPPORT     (* Protocol not supported *)
  | ESOCKTNOSUPPORT     (* Socket type not supported *)
  | EOPNOTSUPP          (* Operation not supported on socket *)
  | EPFNOSUPPORT        (* Protocol family not supported *)
  | EAFNOSUPPORT        (* Address family not supported by protocol family *)
  | EADDRINUSE          (* Address already in use *)
  | EADDRNOTAVAIL       (* Can't assign requested address *)
  | ENETDOWN            (* Network is down *)
  | ENETUNREACH         (* Network is unreachable *)
  | ENETRESET           (* Network dropped connection on reset *)
  | ECONNABORTED        (* Software caused connection abort *)
  | ECONNRESET          (* Connection reset by peer *)
  | ENOBUFS             (* No buffer space available *)
  | EISCONN             (* Socket is already connected *)
  | ENOTCONN            (* Socket is not connected *)
  | ESHUTDOWN           (* Can't send after socket shutdown *)
  | ETOOMANYREFS        (* Too many references: can't splice *)
  | ETIMEDOUT           (* Connection timed out *)
  | ECONNREFUSED        (* Connection refused *)
  | ELOOP               (* Too many levels of symbolic links *)
  | ENAMETOOLONG        (* File name too long *)
  | EHOSTDOWN           (* Host is down *)
  | EHOSTUNREACH        (* No route to host *)
  | ENOTEMPTY           (* Directory not empty *)
  | EPROCLIM            (* Too many processes *)
  | EUSERS              (* Too many users *)
  | EDQUOT              (* Disc quota exceeded *)
  | ESTALE              (* Stale NFS file handle *)
  | EREMOTE             (* Too many levels of remote in path *)
  | EIDRM               (* Identifier removed *)
  | EDEADLK             (* Deadlock condition. *)
  | ENOLCK              (* No record locks available. *)
  | ENOSYS              (* Function not implemented *)
  | EUNKNOWNERR


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         151


    The type of error codes.

exception Unix_error of error * string * string

    Raised by the system calls below when an error is encountered.  The first
    component is the error code; the second component is the function name;
    the third component is the string parameter to the function, if it has
    one, or the empty string otherwise.

value error_message : error -> string

    Return a string describing the given error code.

value handle_unix_error : ('a -> 'b) -> 'a -> 'b

    handle_unix_error f x applies f to x and returns the result.  If the
    exception Unix_error is raised, it prints a message describing the error
    and exits with code 2.


Interface with the parent process

value environment : unit -> string vect

    Return the process environment, as an array of strings with the format
    ``variable=value''.  See also sys__getenv.


Process handling

type process_status =
    WEXITED of int
  | WSIGNALED of int * bool
  | WSTOPPED of int

    The termination status of a process.  WEXITED means that the process
    terminated normally by exit; the argument is the return code.  WSIGNALED
    means that the process was killed by a signal; the first argument is the
    signal number, the second argument indicates whether a ``core dump'' was
    performed.  WSTOPPED means that the process was stopped by a signal; the
    argument is the signal number.

type wait_flag =
    WNOHANG
  | WUNTRACED

    Flags for waitopt and waitpid.  WNOHANG means do not block if no child
    has died yet, but immediately return with a pid equal to 0.  WUNTRACED
    means report also the children that receive stop signals.

value execv : string -> string vect -> unit

    execv prog args execute the program in file prog, with the arguments
    args, and the current process environment.

value execve : string -> string vect -> string vect -> unit


Chapter 16.  The unix library: Unix system calls                           152


    Same as execv, except that the third argument provides the environment to
    the program executed.

value execvp : string -> string vect -> unit

    Same as execv, except that the program is searched in the path.

value fork : unit -> int

    Fork a new process.  The returned integer is 0 for the child process, the
    pid of the child process for the parent process.

value wait : unit -> int * process_status

    Wait until one of the children processes die, and return its pid and
    termination status.

value waitopt : wait_flag list -> int * process_status

    Same as wait, but takes a list of options to avoid blocking, or also
    report stopped children.  The pid returned is 0 if no child has changed
    status.

value waitpid : wait_flag list -> int -> int * process_status

    Same as waitopt, but waits for the process whose pid is given.  Negative
    pid arguments represent process groups.

value system : string -> process_status

    Execute the given command, wait until it terminates, and return its
    termination status.  The string is interpreted by the shell /bin/sh and
    therefore can contain redirections, quotes, variables, etc.  The result
    WEXITED 127 indicates that the shell couldn't be executed.

value getpid : unit -> int

    Return the pid of the process.

value getppid : unit -> int

    Return the pid of the parent process.

value nice : int -> int

    Change the process priority.  The integer argument is added to the
    ``nice'' value.  (Higher values of the ``nice'' value mean lower
    priorities.)  Return the new nice value.


Basic file input/output

type file_descr

    The abstract type of file descriptors.


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         153


value stdin : file_descr
value stdout : file_descr
value stderr : file_descr

    File descriptors for standard input, standard output and standard error.

type open_flag =
    O_RDONLY                            (* Open for reading *)
  | O_WRONLY                            (* Open for writing *)
  | O_RDWR                              (* Open for reading and writing *)
  | O_NDELAY                            (* Open in non-blocking mode *)
  | O_APPEND                            (* Open for append *)
  | O_CREAT                             (* Create if nonexistent *)
  | O_TRUNC                             (* Truncate to 0 length if existing *)
  | O_EXCL                              (* Fail if existing *)

    The flags to open.

type file_perm == int

    The type of file access rights.

value open : string -> open_flag list -> file_perm -> file_descr

    Open the named file with the given flags.  Third argument is the
    permissions to give to the file if it is created.  Return a file
    descriptor on the named file.

value close : file_descr -> unit

    Close a file descriptor.

value read : file_descr -> string -> int -> int -> int

    read fd buff start len reads len characters from descriptor fd, storing
    them in string buff, starting at position ofs in string buff.  Return the
    number of characters actually read.

value write : file_descr -> string -> int -> int -> int

    write fd buff start len writes len characters to descriptor fd, taking
    them from string buff, starting at position ofs in string buff.  Return
    the number of characters actually written.


Interfacing with the standard input/output library (module io).

value in_channel_of_descr : file_descr -> in_channel

    Create an input channel reading from the given descriptor.

value out_channel_of_descr : file_descr -> out_channel

    Create an output channel writing on the given descriptor.

value descr_of_in_channel : in_channel -> file_descr

    Return the descriptor corresponding to an input channel.


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         154


value descr_of_out_channel : out_channel -> file_descr

    Return the descriptor corresponding to an output channel.


Seeking and truncating

type seek_command =
    SEEK_SET
  | SEEK_CUR
  | SEEK_END

    Positioning modes for lseek.  SEEK_SET indicates positions relative to
    the beginning of the file, SEEK_CUR relative to the current position,
    SEEK_END relative to the end of the file.

value lseek : file_descr -> int -> seek_command -> int

    Set the current position for a file descriptor

value truncate : string -> int -> unit

    Truncates the named file to the given size.

value ftruncate : file_descr -> int -> unit

    Truncates the file corresponding to the given descriptor to the given
    size.


File statistics

type file_kind =
    S_REG                               (* Regular file *)
  | S_DIR                               (* Directory *)
  | S_CHR                               (* Character device *)
  | S_BLK                               (* Block device *)
  | S_LNK                               (* Symbolic link *)
  | S_FIFO                              (* Named pipe *)
  | S_SOCK                              (* Socket *)
type stats =
  { st_dev : int;                       (* Device number *)
    st_ino : int;                       (* Inode number *)
    st_kind : file_kind;                (* Kind of the file *)
    st_perm : file_perm;                (* Access rights *)
    st_nlink : int;                     (* Number of links *)
    st_uid : int;                       (* User id of the owner *)
    st_gid : int;                       (* Group id of the owner *)
    st_rdev : int;                      (* Device minor number *)
    st_size : int;                      (* Size in bytes *)
    st_atime : int;                     (* Last access time *)
    st_mtime : int;                     (* Last modification time *)
    st_ctime : int }                    (* Last status change time *)

    The informations returned by the stat calls.

value stat : string -> stats


Chapter 16.  The unix library: Unix system calls                           155


    Return the information for the named file.

value lstat : string -> stats

    Same as stat, but in case the file is a symbolic link, return the
    information for the link itself.

value fstat : file_descr -> stats

    Return the information for the file associated with the given descriptor.


Operations on file names

value unlink : string -> unit

    Removes the named file

value rename : string -> string -> unit

    rename old new changes the name of a file from old to new.

value link : string -> string -> unit

    link source dest creates a hard link named dest to the file named new.


File permissions and ownership

type access_permission =
    R_OK                                (* Read permission *)
  | W_OK                                (* Write permission *)
  | X_OK                                (* Execution permission *)
  | F_OK                                (* File exists *)

    Flags for the access call.

value chmod : string -> file_perm -> unit

    Change the permissions of the named file.

value fchmod : file_descr -> file_perm -> unit

    Change the permissions of an opened file.

value chown : string -> int -> int -> unit

    Change the owner uid and owner gid of the named file.

value fchown : file_descr -> int -> int -> unit

    Change the owner uid and owner gid of an opened file.

value umask : int -> int

    Set the process creation mask, and return the previous mask.


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         156


value access : string -> access_permission list -> unit

    Check that the process has the given permissions over the named file.
    Raise Unix_error otherwise.


File descriptor hacking

value fcntl_int : file_descr -> int -> int -> int

    Interface to fcntl in the case where the argument is an integer.  The
    first integer argument is the command code; the second is the integer
    parameter.

value fcntl_ptr : file_descr -> int -> string -> int

    Interface to fcntl in the case where the argument is a pointer.  The
    integer argument is the command code.  A pointer to the string argument
    is passed as argument to the command.


Directories

value mkdir : string -> file_perm -> unit

    Create a directory with the given permissions.

value rmdir : string -> unit

    Remove an empty directory.

value chdir : string -> unit

    Change the process working directory.

value getcwd : unit -> string

    Return the name of the current working directory.

type dir_handle

    The type of descriptors over opened directories.

value opendir : string -> dir_handle

    Open a descriptor on a directory

value readdir : dir_handle -> string

    Return the next entry in a directory.  Raise End_of_file when the end of
    the directory has been reached.

value rewinddir : dir_handle -> unit

    Reposition the descriptor to the beginning of the directory


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         157


value closedir : dir_handle -> unit

    Close a directory descriptor.


Pipes and redirections

value pipe : unit -> file_descr * file_descr

    Create a pipe.  The first component of the result is opened for reading,
    that's the exit to the pipe.  The second component is opened for writing,
    that's the entrace to the pipe.

value dup : file_descr -> file_descr

    Duplicate a descriptor.

value dup2 : file_descr -> file_descr -> unit

    dup2 fd1 fd2 duplicates fd1 to fd2, closing fd2 if already opened.

value open_process_in: string -> in_channel
value open_process_out: string -> out_channel
value open_process: string -> in_channel * out_channel

    High-level pipe and process management.  These functions run the given
    command in parallel with the program, and return channels connected to
    the standard input and/or the standard output of the command.  The
    command is interpreted by the shell /bin/sh (cf.  system).  Warning:
    writes on channels are buffered, hence be careful to call flush at the
    right times to ensure correct synchronization.

value close_process_in: in_channel -> process_status
value close_process_out: out_channel -> process_status
value close_process: in_channel * out_channel -> process_status

    Close channels opened by open_process_in, open_process_out and
    open_process, respectively, wait for the associated command to terminate,
    and return its termination status.


Symbolic links

value symlink : string -> string -> unit

    symlink source dest creates the file dest as a symbolic link to the file
    source.

value readlink : string -> string

    Read the contents of a link.


Named pipes

value mkfifo : string -> file_perm -> unit


Chapter 16.  The unix library: Unix system calls                           158


    Create a named pipe with the given permissions.


Special files

value ioctl_int : file_descr -> int -> int -> int

    Interface to ioctl in the case where the argument is an integer.  The
    first integer argument is the command code; the second is the integer
    parameter.

value ioctl_ptr : file_descr -> int -> string -> int

    Interface to ioctl in the case where the argument is a pointer.  The
    integer argument is the command code.  A pointer to the string argument
    is passed as argument to the command.


Polling

value select :
  file_descr list -> file_descr list -> file_descr list -> float ->
        file_descr list * file_descr list * file_descr list

    Wait until some input/output operations become possible on some channels.
    The three list arguments are, respectively, a set of descriptors to check
    for reading (first argument), for writing (second argument), or for
    exceptional conditions (third argument).  The fourth argument is the
    maximal timeout, in seconds; a negative fourth argument means no timeout
    (unbounded wait).  The result is composed of three sets of descriptors:
    those ready for reading (first component), ready for writing (second
    component), and over which an exceptional condition is pending (third
    component).


Locking

type lock_command =
    F_ULOCK               (* Unlock a region *)
  | F_LOCK                (* Lock a region, and block if already locked *)
  | F_TLOCK               (* Lock a region, or fail if already locked *)
  | F_TEST                (* Test a region for other process' locks *)

    Commands for lockf.

value lockf : file_descr -> lock_command -> int -> unit

    lockf fd cmd size puts a lock on a region of the file opened as fd.  The
    region starts at the current read/write position for fd (as set by
    lseek), and extends size bytes forward if size is positive, size bytes
    backwards if size is negative, or to the end of the file if size is zero.


Signals

type signal =
    SIGHUP              (* hangup *)


Chapter 16.  The unix library: Unix system calls                           159


  | SIGINT              (* interrupt *)
  | SIGQUIT             (* quit *)
  | SIGILL              (* illegal instruction (not reset when caught) *)
  | SIGTRAP             (* trace trap (not reset when caught) *)
  | SIGABRT             (* used by abort *)
  | SIGEMT              (* EMT instruction *)
  | SIGFPE              (* floating point exception *)
  | SIGKILL             (* kill (cannot be caught or ignored) *)
  | SIGBUS              (* bus error *)
  | SIGSEGV             (* segmentation violation *)
  | SIGSYS              (* bad argument to system call *)
  | SIGPIPE             (* write on a pipe with no one to read it *)
  | SIGALRM             (* alarm clock *)
  | SIGTERM             (* software termination signal from kill *)
  | SIGURG              (* urgent condition on IO channel *)
  | SIGSTOP             (* sendable stop signal not from tty *)
  | SIGTSTP             (* stop signal from tty *)
  | SIGCONT             (* continue a stopped process *)
  | SIGCHLD             (* to parent on child stop or exit *)
  | SIGIO               (* input/output possible signal *)
  | SIGXCPU             (* exceeded CPU time limit *)
  | SIGXFSZ             (* exceeded file size limit *)
  | SIGVTALRM           (* virtual time alarm *)
  | SIGPROF             (* profiling time alarm *)
  | SIGWINCH            (* window changed *)
  | SIGLOST             (* resource lost (eg, record-lock lost) *)
  | SIGUSR1             (* user defined signal 1 *)
  | SIGUSR2             (* user defined signal 2 *)

    The type of signals.

type signal_handler =
    Signal_default                      (* Default behavior for the signal *)
  | Signal_ignore                       (* Ignore the signal *)
  | Signal_handle of (unit -> unit)     (* Call the given function
                                           when the signal occurs. *)

    The behavior on receipt of a signal

value kill : int -> signal -> unit

    Send a signal to the process with the given process id.

value signal : signal -> signal_handler -> unit

    Set the behavior to be taken on receipt of the given signal.

value pause : unit -> unit

    Wait until a non-ignored signal is delivered.


Time functions

type process_times =
  { tms_utime : float;          (* User time for the process *)
    tms_stime : float;          (* System time for the process *)
    tms_cutime : float;         (* User time for the children processes *)


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         160


    tms_cstime : float }        (* System time for the children processes *)

    The execution times (CPU times) of a process.

type tm =
  { tm_sec : int;                       (* Seconds 0..59 *)
    tm_min : int;                       (* Minutes 0..59 *)
    tm_hour : int;                      (* Hours 0..23 *)
    tm_mday : int;                      (* Day of month 1..31 *)
    tm_mon : int;                       (* Month of year 0..11 *)
    tm_year : int;                      (* Year - 1900 *)
    tm_wday : int;                      (* Day of week (Sunday is 0) *)
    tm_yday : int;                      (* Day of year 0..365 *)
    tm_isdst : bool }                   (* Daylight time savings in effect *)

    The type representing wallclock time and calendar date.

value time : unit -> int

    Return the current time since 00:00:00 GMT, Jan.  1, 1970, in seconds.

value gettimeofday : unit -> float

    Same as time, but with resolution better than 1 second.

value gmtime : int -> tm

    Convert a time in seconds, as returned by time, into a date and a time.
    Assumes Greenwich meridian time zone.

value localtime : int -> tm

    Convert a time in seconds, as returned by time, into a date and a time.
    Assumes the local time zone.

value alarm : int -> int

    Schedule a SIGALRM signals after the given number of seconds.

value sleep : int -> unit

    Stop execution for the given number of seconds.

value times : unit -> process_times

    Return the execution times of the process.

value utimes : string -> int -> int -> unit

    Set the last access time (second arg) and last modification time (third
    arg) for a file.  Times are expressed in seconds from 00:00:00 GMT, Jan.
    1, 1970.


User id, group id

value getuid : unit -> int


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         161


    Return the user id of the user executing the process.

value geteuid : unit -> int

    Return the effective user id under which the process runs.

value setuid : int -> unit

    Set the real user id and effective user id for the process.

value getgid : unit -> int

    Return the group id of the user executing the process.

value getegid : unit -> int

    Return the effective group id under which the process runs.

value setgid : int -> unit

    Set the real group id and effective group id for the process.

value getgroups : unit -> int vect

    Return the list of groups to which the user executing the process
    belongs.

type passwd_entry =
  { pw_name : string;
    pw_passwd : string;
    pw_uid : int;
    pw_gid : int;
    pw_gecos : string;
    pw_dir : string;
    pw_shell : string }

    Structure of entries in the passwd database.

type group_entry =
  { gr_name : string;
    gr_passwd : string;
    gr_gid : int;
    gr_mem : string vect }

    Structure of entries in the groups database.

value getlogin : unit -> string

    Return the login name of the user executing the process.

value getpwnam : string -> passwd_entry

    Find an entry in passwd with the given name, or raise Not_found.

value getgrnam : string -> group_entry

    Find an entry in group with the given name, or raise Not_found.


Chapter 16.  The unix library: Unix system calls                           162


value getpwuid : int -> passwd_entry

    Find an entry in passwd with the given user id, or raise Not_found.

value getgrgid : int -> group_entry

    Find an entry in group with the given group id, or raise Not_found.


Internet addresses

type inet_addr

    The abstract type of Internet addresses.

value inet_addr_of_string : string -> inet_addr
value string_of_inet_addr : inet_addr -> string

    Conversions between string with the format XXX.YYY.ZZZ.TTT and Internet
    addresses.  inet_addr_of_string raises Failure when given a string that
    does not match this format.


Sockets

type socket_domain =
    PF_UNIX                             (* Unix domain *)
  | PF_INET                             (* Internet domain *)

    The type of socket domains.

type socket_type =
    SOCK_STREAM                         (* Stream socket *)
  | SOCK_DGRAM                          (* Datagram socket *)
  | SOCK_RAW                            (* Raw socket *)
  | SOCK_SEQPACKET                      (* Sequenced packets socket *)

    The type of socket kinds, specifying the semantics of communications.

type sockaddr =
    ADDR_UNIX of string
  | ADDR_INET of inet_addr * int

    The type of socket addresses.  ADDR_UNIX name is a socket address in the
    Unix domain; name is a file name in the file system.
    ADDR_INET(addr,port) is a socket address in the Internet domain; addr is
    the Internet address of the machine, and port is the port number.

type shutdown_command =
    SHUTDOWN_RECEIVE                    (* Close for receiving *)
  | SHUTDOWN_SEND                       (* Close for sending *)
  | SHUTDOWN_ALL                        (* Close both *)

    The type of commands for shutdown.

type msg_flag =
    MSG_OOB


Chapter 16.  The unix library: Unix system calls                           163


  | MSG_DONTROUTE
  | MSG_PEEK

    The flags for recv, recvfrom, send and sendto.

value socket : socket_domain -> socket_type -> int -> file_descr

    Create a new socket in the given domain, and with the given kind.  The
    third argument is the protocol type; 0 selects the default protocol for
    that kind of sockets.

value socketpair :
        socket_domain -> socket_type -> int -> file_descr * file_descr

    Create a pair of unnamed sockets, connected together.

value accept : file_descr -> file_descr * sockaddr

    Accept connections on the given socket.  The returned descriptor is a
    socket connected to the client; the returned address is the address of
    the connecting client.

value bind : file_descr -> sockaddr -> unit

    Bind a socket to an address.

value connect : file_descr -> sockaddr -> unit

    Connect a socket to an address.

value listen : file_descr -> int -> unit

    Set up a socket for receiving connection requests.  The integer argument
    is the maximal number of pending requests.

value shutdown : file_descr -> shutdown_command -> unit

    Shutdown a socket connection.  SHUTDOWN_SEND as second argument causes
    reads on the other end of the connection to return an end-of-file
    condition.  SHUTDOWN_RECEIVE causes writes on the other end of the
    connection to return a closed pipe condition (SIGPIPE signal).

value getsockname : file_descr -> sockaddr

    Return the address of the given socket.

value getpeername : file_descr -> sockaddr

    Return the address of the host connected to the given socket.

value recv : file_descr -> string -> int -> int -> msg_flag list -> int
value recvfrom :
        file_descr -> string -> int -> int -> msg_flag list -> int * sockaddr

    Receive data from an unconnected socket.


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         164


value send : file_descr -> string -> int -> int -> msg_flag list -> int
value sendto :
        file_descr -> string -> int -> int -> msg_flag list -> sockaddr -> int

    Send data over an unconnected socket.


High-level network connection functions

value open_connection : sockaddr -> in_channel * out_channel

    Connect to a server at the given address.  Return a pair of buffered
    channels connected to the server.  Remember to call flush on the output
    channel at the right times to ensure correct synchronization.

value shutdown_connection : in_channel -> unit

    ``Shut down'' a connection established with open_connection; that is,
    transmit an end-of-file condition to the server reading on the other side
    of the connection.

value establish_server :  (in_channel ->  out_channel -> unit)  -> sockaddr  -
> unit

    Establish a server on the given address.  The function given as first
    argument is called for each connection with two buffered channels
    connected to the client.  A new process is created for each connection.
    The function establish_server never returns normally.


Host and protocol databases

type host_entry =
  { h_name : string;
    h_aliases : string vect;
    h_addrtype : socket_domain;
    h_addr_list : inet_addr vect }

    Structure of entries in the hosts database.

type protocol_entry =
  { p_name : string;
    p_aliases : string vect;
    p_proto : int }

    Structure of entries in the protocols database.

type service_entry =
  { s_name : string;
    s_aliases : string vect;
    s_port : int;
    s_proto : string }

    Structure of entries in the services database.

value gethostname : unit -> string


Chapter 16.  The unix library: Unix system calls                           165


    Return the name of the local host.

value gethostbyname : string -> host_entry

    Find an entry in hosts with the given name, or raise Not_found.

value gethostbyaddr : inet_addr -> host_entry

    Find an entry in hosts with the given address, or raise Not_found.

value getprotobyname : string -> protocol_entry

    Find an entry in protocols with the given name, or raise Not_found.

value getprotobynumber : int -> protocol_entry

    Find an entry in protocols with the given protocol number, or raise
    Not_found.

value getservbyname : string -> string -> service_entry

    Find an entry in services with the given name, or raise Not_found.

value getservbyport : int -> string -> service_entry

    Find an entry in services with the given service number, or raise
    Not_found.


Terminal interface

    The following functions implement the POSIX standard terminal interface.
    They provide control over asynchronous communication ports and
    pseudo-terminals.  Refer to the termios man page for a complete
    description.

type terminal_io = {

    Input modes:

    mutable c_ignbrk: bool;  (* Ignore the break condition. *)
    mutable c_brkint: bool;  (* Signal interrupt on break condition. *)
    mutable c_ignpar: bool;  (* Ignore characters with parity errors. *)
    mutable c_parmrk: bool;  (* Mark parity errors. *)
    mutable c_inpck: bool;   (* Enable parity check on input. *)
    mutable c_istrip: bool;  (* Strip 8th bit on input characters. *)
    mutable c_inlcr: bool;   (* Map NL to CR on input. *)
    mutable c_igncr: bool;   (* Ignore CR on input. *)
    mutable c_icrnl: bool;   (* Map CR to NL on input. *)
    mutable c_ixon: bool;    (* Recognize XON/XOFF characters on input. *)
    mutable c_ixoff: bool;   (* Emit XON/XOFF chars to control input flow. *)

    Output modes:

    mutable c_opost: bool;   (* Enable output processing. *)

    Control modes:


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         166


    mutable c_obaud: int;    (* Output baud rate (0 means close connection).*)
    mutable c_ibaud: int;    (* Input baud rate. *)
    mutable c_csize: int;    (* Number of bits per character (5-8). *)
    mutable c_cstopb: int;   (* Number of stop bits (1-2). *)
    mutable c_cread: bool;   (* Reception is enabled. *)
    mutable c_parenb: bool;  (* Enable parity generation and detection. *)
    mutable c_parodd: bool;  (* Specify odd parity instead of even. *)
    mutable c_hupcl: bool;   (* Hang up on last close. *)
    mutable c_clocal: bool;  (* Ignore modem status lines. *)

    Local modes:

    mutable c_isig: bool;    (* Generate signal on INTR, QUIT, SUSP. *)
    mutable c_icanon: bool;  (* Enable canonical processing
                                (line buffering and editing) *)
    mutable c_noflsh: bool;  (* Disable flush after INTR, QUIT, SUSP. *)
    mutable c_echo: bool;    (* Echo input characters. *)
    mutable c_echoe: bool;   (* Echo ERASE (to erase previous character). *)
    mutable c_echok: bool;   (* Echo KILL (to erase the current line). *)
    mutable c_echonl: bool;  (* Echo NL even if c_echo is not set. *)

    Control characters:

    mutable c_vintr: char;   (* Interrupt character (usually ctrl-C). *)
    mutable c_vquit: char;   (* Quit character (usually ctrl-\). *)
    mutable c_verase: char;  (* Erase character (usually DEL or ctrl-H). *)
    mutable c_vkill: char;   (* Kill line character (usually ctrl-U). *)
    mutable c_veof: char;    (* End-of-file character (usually ctrl-D). *)
    mutable c_veol: char;    (* Alternate end-of-line char. (usually none). *)
    mutable c_vmin: int;     (* Minimum number of characters to read
                                before the read request is satisfied. *)
    mutable c_vtime: int;    (* Maximum read wait (in 0.1s units). *)
    mutable c_vstart: char;  (* Start character (usually ctrl-Q). *)
    mutable c_vstop: char    (* Stop character (usually ctrl-S). *)
  }
value tcgetattr: file_descr -> terminal_io

    Return the status of the terminal referred to by the given file
    descriptor.

type setattr_when = TCSANOW | TCSADRAIN | TCSAFLUSH
value tcsetattr: file_descr -> setattr_when -> terminal_io -> unit

    Set the status of the terminal referred to by the given file descriptor.
    The second argument indicates when the status change takes place:
    immediately (TCSANOW), when all pending output has been transmitted
    (TCSADRAIN), or after flushing all input that has been received but not
    read (TCSAFLUSH). TCSADRAIN is recommended when changing the output
    parameters; TCSAFLUSH, when changing the input parameters.

value tcsendbreak: file_descr -> int -> unit

    Send a break condition on the given file descriptor.  The second argument
    is the duration of the break, in 0.1s units; 0 means standard duration
    (0.25s).

value tcdrain: file_descr -> unit


Chapter 16.   The unix library:  Unix system calls                         167


    Waits until all output written on the given file descriptor has been
    transmitted.

type flush_queue = TCIFLUSH | TCOFLUSH | TCIOFLUSH
value tcflush: file_descr -> flush_queue -> unit

    Discard data written on the given file descriptor but not yet
    transmitted, or data received but not yet read, depending on the second
    argument:  TCIFLUSH flushes data received but not read, TCOFLUSH flushes
    data written but not transmitted, and TCIOFLUSH flushes both.

type flow_action = TCOOFF | TCOON | TCIOFF | TCION
value tcflow: file_descr -> flow_action -> unit

    Suspend or restart reception or transmission of data on the given file
    descriptor, depending on the second argument:  TCOOFF suspends output,
    TCOON restarts output, TCIOFF transmits a STOP character to suspend
    input, and TCION transmits a START character to restart input.











Chapter 17



The num library:  arbitrary-precision rational arithmetic



The num library (distributed in contrib/libnum) implements exact-precision
rational arithmetic.  It is built upon the state-of-the-art BigNum
arbitrary-precision integer arithmetic package, and therefore achieves very
high performance.
  The functions provided in this library are fully documented in The CAML
Numbers Reference Manual by Valerie Menissier-Morain, technical report 141,
INRIA, july 1992 (available by anonymous FTP from ftp.inria.fr, directory
INRIA/publications/RT, file RT-0141.ps.Z). A summary of the functions is given
below.
  Programs that use the num library must be linked in ``custom runtime'' mode,
as follows:

        camlc -custom other options nums.zo other files -lnums

For interactive use of the num library, run camllight camlnum.

Mac:  This library is not available.

PC:   This library is available by default in the standard runtime system and
      in the toplevel system.  Programs that use this library can be linked
      normally, without the -custom option.


17.1 num:  operations on numbers

    Numbers (type num) are arbitrary-precision rational numbers, plus the
    special elements 1/0 (infinity) and 0/0 (undefined).

type num = Int of int | Big_int of big_int | Ratio of ratio

    The type of numbers.

value normalize_num : num -> num
value numerator_num : num -> num
value denominator_num : num -> num

Arithmetic operations

value prefix +/ : num -> num -> num
value add_num : num -> num -> num

    Addition



                                     168


Chapter 17.  The num library: arbitrary-precision rational arithmetic      169


value minus_num : num -> num

    Unary negation.

value prefix -/ : num -> num -> num
value sub_num : num -> num -> num

    Subtraction

value prefix */ : num -> num -> num
value mult_num : num -> num -> num

    Multiplication

value square_num : num -> num

    Squaring

value prefix // : num -> num -> num
value div_num : num -> num -> num

    Division

value quo_num : num -> num -> num
value mod_num : num -> num -> num

    Euclidean division:  quotient and remainder

value prefix **/ : num -> num -> num
value power_num : num -> num -> num

    Exponentiation

value is_integer_num : num -> bool

    Test if a number is an integer

value integer_num : num -> num
value floor_num : num -> num
value round_num : num -> num
value ceiling_num : num -> num

    Approximate a number by an integer.  floor_num n returns the largest
    integer smaller or equal to n.  ceiling_num n returns the smallest
    integer bigger or equal to n.  integer_num n returns the integer closest
    to n.  In case of ties, rounds towards zero.  round_num n returns the
    integer closest to n.  In case of ties, rounds off zero.

value sign_num : num -> int

    Return -1, 0 or 1 according to the sign of the argument.

value prefix =/ : num -> num -> bool
value prefix </ : num -> num -> bool
value prefix >/ : num -> num -> bool
value prefix <=/ : num -> num -> bool
value prefix >=/ : num -> num -> bool
value prefix <>/ : num -> num -> bool


Chapter 17.   The num library:  arbitrary-precision rational arithmetic    170


value eq_num : num -> num -> bool
value lt_num : num -> num -> bool
value le_num : num -> num -> bool
value gt_num : num -> num -> bool
value ge_num : num -> num -> bool

    Usual comparisons between numbers

value compare_num : num -> num -> int

    Return -1, 0 or 1 if the first argument is less than, equal to, or
    greater than the second argument.

value max_num : num -> num -> num
value min_num : num -> num -> num

    Return the greater (resp.  the smaller) of the two arguments.

value abs_num : num -> num

    Absolute value.

value succ_num: num -> num

    succ n is n+1

value pred_num: num -> num

    pred n is n-1

value incr_num: num ref -> unit

    incr r is r:=!r+1, where r is a reference to a number.

value decr_num: num ref -> unit

    decr r is r:=!r-1, where r is a reference to a number.


Coercions with strings

value string_of_num : num -> string

    Convert a number to a string, using fractional notation.

value approx_num_fix : int -> num -> string
value approx_num_exp : int -> num -> string

    Approximate a number by a decimal.  The first argument is the required
    precision.  The second argument is the number to approximate.  approx_fix
    uses decimal notation; the first argument is the number of digits after
    the decimal point.  approx_exp uses scientific (exponential) notation;
    the first argument is the number of digits in the mantissa.

value num_of_string : string -> num

    Convert a string to a number.


Chapter 17.   The num library:  arbitrary-precision rational arithmetic    171


Coercions between numerical types

value int_of_num : num -> int
value num_of_int : int -> num
value nat_of_num : num -> nat__nat
value num_of_nat : nat__nat -> num
value num_of_big_int : big_int -> num
value big_int_of_num : num -> big_int
value ratio_of_num : num -> ratio
value num_of_ratio : ratio -> num
value float_of_num : num -> float
value num_of_float : float -> num
value sys_print_num : int -> string -> num -> string -> unit
value print_num : num -> unit


17.2 arith_status:  flags that control rational arithmetic

value arith_status: unit -> unit

    Print the current status of the arithmetic flags.

value get_error_when_null_denominator : unit -> bool
value set_error_when_null_denominator : bool -> unit

    Get or set the flag null_denominator.  When on, attempting to create a
    rational with a null denominator raises an exception.  When off,
    rationals with null denominators are accepted.  Initially:  on.

value get_normalize_ratio : unit -> bool
value set_normalize_ratio : bool -> unit

    Get or set the flag normalize_ratio.  When on, rational numbers are
    normalized after each operation.  When off, rational numbers are not
    normalized until printed.  Initially:  off.

value get_normalize_ratio_when_printing : unit -> bool
value set_normalize_ratio_when_printing : bool -> unit

    Get or set the flag normalize_ratio_when_printing.  When on, rational
    numbers are normalized before being printed.  When off, rational numbers
    are printed as is, without normalization.  Initially:  on.

value get_approx_printing : unit -> bool
value set_approx_printing : bool -> unit

    Get or set the flag approx_printing.  When on, rational numbers are
    printed as a decimal approximation.  When off, rational numbers are
    printed as a fraction.  Initially:  off.

value get_floating_precision : unit -> int
value set_floating_precision : int -> unit

    Get or set the parameter floating_precision.  This parameter is the
    number of digits displayed when approx_printing is on.  Initially:  12.











Chapter 18



The str library:  regular expressions and string processing



The str library (distributed in contrib/libstr) provides high-level string
processing functions, some based on regular expressions.  It is intended to
support the kind of file processing that is usually performed with scripting
languages such as awk, perl or sed.
  Programs that use the str library must be linked in ``custom runtime'' mode,
as follows:

        camlc -custom other options str.zo other files -lstr

For interactive use of the str library, run camllight camlstr.

Mac:  This library is not available.

PC:   This library is not available.


18.1 str:  regular expressions and high-level string processing

Regular expressions

type regexp

    The type of compiled regular expressions.

value regexp: string -> regexp

    Compile a regular expression.  The syntax for regular expressions is the
    same as in Gnu Emacs.  The special characters are \$^.*+?[].  The
    following constructs are recognized:
    .      matches any character except newline
    *      (postfix) matches the previous expression zero, one or several
    times
    +      (postfix) matches the previous expression one or several times
    ?      (postfix) matches the previous expression once or not at all
    [..]   character set; ranges are denoted with -, as in a-z; an initial ^,
    as in ^0-9, complements the set
    ^      matches at beginning of line
    $      matches at end of line
    \|     (infix) alternative between two expressions
    \(..\) grouping and naming of the enclosed expression
    \1     the text matched by the first \(...\) expression (\2 for the
    second expression, etc)
    \b     matches word boundaries


                                     172


Chapter 18.   The str library:  regular expressions and string processing  173


    \      quotes special characters.

value regexp_case_fold: string -> regexp

    Same as regexp, but the compiled expression will match text in a
    case-insensitive way:  uppercase and lowercase letters will be considered
    equivalent.


String matching and searching

value string_match: regexp -> string -> int -> bool

    string_match r s start tests whether the characters in s starting at
    position start match the regular expression r.  The first character of a
    string has position 0, as usual.

value search_forward: regexp -> string -> int -> int

    search_forward r s start searchs the string s for a substring matching
    the regular expression r.  The search starts at position start and
    proceeds towards the end of the string.  Return the position of the first
    character of the matched substring, or raise Not_found if no substring
    matches.

value search_backward: regexp -> string -> int -> int

    Same as search_forward, but the search proceeds towards the beginning of
    the string.

value matched_string: string -> string

    matched_string s returns the substring of s that was matched by the
    latest string_match, search_forward or search_backward.  The user must
    make sure that the parameter s is the same string that was passed to the
    matching or searching function.

value match_beginning: unit -> int
value match_end: unit -> int

    match_beginning() returns the position of the first character of the
    substring that was matched by string_match, search_forward or
    search_backward.  match_end() returns the position of the character
    following the last character of the matched substring.

value matched_group: int -> string -> string

    matched_group n s returns the substring of s that was matched by the nth
    group \(...\) of the regular expression during the latest string_match,
    search_forward or search_backward.  The user must make sure that the
    parameter s is the same string that was passed to the matching or
    searching function.

value group_beginning: int -> int
value group_end: int -> int

    group_beginning n returns the position of the first character of the
    substring that was matched by the nth group of the regular expression.


Chapter 18.   The str library:  regular expressions and string processing  174


    group_end n returns the position of the character following the last
    character of the matched substring.


Replacement

value global_replace: regexp -> string -> string -> string

    global_replace regexp repl s returns a string identical to s, except that
    all substrings of s that match regexp have been replaced by repl.  The
    replacement text repl can contain \1, \2, etc; these sequences will be
    replaced by the text matched by the corresponding group in the regular
    expression.  \0 stands for the text matched by the whole regular
    expression.

value replace_first: regexp -> string -> string -> string

    Same as global_replace, except that only the first substring matching the
    regular expression is replaced.

value global_substitute: regexp -> (string -> string) -> string -> string

    global_substitute regexp subst s returns a string identical to s, except
    that all substrings of s that match regexp have been replaced by the
    result of function subst.  The function subst is called once for each
    matching substring, and receives s (the whole text) as argument.

value substitute_first: regexp -> (string -> string) -> string -> string

    Same as global_substitute, except that only the first substring matching
    the regular expression is replaced.


Splitting

value split: regexp -> string -> string list

    split r s splits s into substrings, taking as delimiters the substrings
    that match r, and returns the list of substrings.  For instance,
    split (regexp "[ \t]+") s splits s into blank-separated words.

value bounded_split: regexp -> string -> int -> string list

    Same as split, but splits into at most n substrings, where n is the extra
    integer parameter.


Joining

value concat: string list -> string

    Same as string__concat:  catenate a list of string.

value join: string -> string list -> string

    Catenate a list of string.  The first argument is a separator, which is
    inserted between the strings.


Chapter 18.   The str library:  regular expressions and string processing  175


Extracting substrings

value string_before: string -> int -> string

    string_before s n returns the substring of all characters of s that
    precede position n (excluding the character at position n).

value string_after: string -> int -> string

    string_after s n returns the substring of all characters of s that follow
    position n (including the character at position n).

value first_chars: string -> int -> string

    first_chars s n returns the first n characters of s.  This is the same
    function as string_before.

value last_chars: string -> int -> string

    last_chars s n returns the last n characters of s.


Formatting

value format: ('a, unit, string) printf__format -> 'a

    Same as printf__sprintf.
























                                    Part V



                                   Appendix




































                                     176











Chapter 19



Further reading



For the interested reader, we list below some references to books and reports
related (sometimes loosely) to Caml Light.


19.1 Programming in ML

The books below are programming courses taught in ML. Their main goal is to
teach programming, not to describe ML in full details --- though most contain
fairly good introductions to the ML language.  Some of those books use the
Standard ML dialect instead of the Caml dialect, so you will have to keep in
mind the differences in syntax and in semantics.

 -  Pierre Weis and Xavier Leroy.  Le langage Caml.  InterEditions, 1993.

    The natural companion to this manual, provided you read French.  This
    book is a step-by-step introduction to programming in Caml, and presents
    many realistic examples of Caml programs.

 -  Guy Cousineau and Michel Mauny.  Approche fonctionnelle de la
    programmation.  Ediscience, 1995.

    Another Caml programming course written in French, with many original
    examples.

 -  Lawrence C. Paulson.  ML for the working programmer.  Cambridge
    University Press, 1991.

    A good introduction to programming in Standard ML. Develops a theorem
    prover as a complete example.  Contains a presentation of the module
    system of Standard ML.

 -  Jeffrey D. Ullman.  Elements of ML programming.  Prentice Hall, 1993.

    Another good introduction to programming in Standard ML. No realistic
    examples, but a very detailed presentation of the language constructs.

 -  Ryan Stansifer.  ML primer.  Prentice-Hall, 1992.

    A short, but nice introduction to programming in Standard ML.

 -  Therese Accart Hardin and Veronique Donzeau-Gouge Viguie.  Concepts et
    outils de la programmation.  Du fonctionnel a l'imperatif avec Caml et
    Ada.  InterEditions, 1992.


                                     177


Chapter 19.   Further reading                                              178


    A first course in programming, that first introduces the main programming
    notions in Caml, then shows them underlying Ada.  Intended for beginners;
    slow-paced for the others.

 -  Rachel Harrison.  Abstract Data Types in Standard ML. John Wiley & Sons,
    1993.

    A presentation of Standard ML from the standpoint of abstract data types.
    Uses intensively the Standard ML module system.

 -  Harold Abelson and Gerald Jay Sussman.  Structure and Interpretation of
    Computer Programs.  The MIT press, 1985.  (French translation:  Structure
    et interpretation des programmes informatiques, InterEditions, 1989.)

    An outstanding course on programming, taught in Scheme, the modern
    dialect of Lisp.  Well worth reading, even if you are more interested in
    ML than in Lisp.


19.2 Descriptions of ML dialects

The books and reports below are descriptions of various programming languages
from the ML family.  They assume some familiarity with ML.

 -  Xavier Leroy and Pierre Weis.  Manuel de reference du langage Caml.
    InterEditions, 1993.

    The French edition of the present reference manual and user's manual.

 -  Robert Harper.  Introduction to Standard ML. Technical report
    ECS-LFCS-86-14, University of Edinburgh, 1986.

    An overview of Standard ML, including the module system.  Terse, but
    still readable.

 -  Robin Milner, Mads Tofte and Robert Harper.  The definition of Standard
    ML. The MIT press, 1990.

    A complete formal definition of Standard ML, in the framework of
    structured operational semantics.  This book is probably the most
    mathematically precise definition of a programming language ever written.
    It is heavy on formalism and extremely terse, so even readers who are
    thoroughly familiar with ML will have major difficulties with it.

 -  Robin Milner and Mads Tofte.  Commentary on Standard ML. The MIT Press,
    1991.

    A commentary on the book above, that attempts to explain the most
    delicate parts and motivate the design choices.  Easier to read than the
    Definition, but still rather involving.

 -  Guy Cousineau and Gerard Huet.  The CAML primer.  Technical report 122,
    INRIA, 1990.

    A short description of the original Caml system, from which Caml Light
    has evolved.  Some familiarity with Lisp is assumed.


Chapter 19.   Further reading                                              179


 -  Pierre Weis et al.  The CAML reference manual, version 2.6.1.  Technical
    report 121, INRIA, 1990.

    The manual for the original Caml system, from which Caml Light has
    evolved.

 -  Michael J. Gordon, Arthur J. Milner and Christopher P. Wadsworth.
    Edinburgh LCF. Lecture Notes in Computer Science volume 78,
    Springer-Verlag, 1979.

    This is the first published description of the ML language, at the time
    when it was nothing more than the control language for the LCF system, a
    theorem prover.  This book is now obsolete, since the ML language has
    much evolved since then; but it is still of historical interest.

 -  Paul Hudak, Simon Peyton-Jones and Philip Wadler.  Report on the
    programming language Haskell, version 1.1.  Technical report, Yale
    University, 1991.

    Haskell is a purely functional language with lazy semantics that shares
    many important points with ML (full functionality, polymorphic typing),
    but has interesting features of its own (dynamic overloading, also called
    type classes).


19.3 Implementing functional programming languages

The references below are intended for those who are curious to learn how a
language like Caml Light is compiled and implemented.

 -  Xavier Leroy.  The ZINC experiment:  an economical implementation of the
    ML language.  Technical report 117, INRIA, 1990.  (Available by anonymous
    FTP on ftp.inria.fr.)

    A description of the ZINC implementation, the prototype ML implementation
    that has evolved into Caml Light.  Large parts of this report still apply
    to the current Caml Light system, in particular the description of the
    execution model and abstract machine.  Other parts are now obsolete.  Yet
    this report still gives a complete overview of the implementation
    techniques used in Caml Light.

 -  Simon Peyton-Jones.  The implementation of functional programming
    languages.  Prentice-Hall, 1987.  (French translation:  Mise en  uvre des
    langages fonctionnels de programmation, Masson, 1990.)

    An excellent description of the implementation of purely functional
    languages with lazy semantics, using the technique known as graph
    reduction.  The part of the book that deals with the transformation from
    ML to enriched lambda-calculus directly applies to Caml Light.  You will
    find a good description of how pattern-matching is compiled and how types
    are inferred.  The remainder of the book does not apply directly to Caml
    Light, since Caml Light is not purely functional (it has side-effects),
    has strict semantics, and does not use graph reduction at all.

 -  Andrew W. Appel.  Compiling with continuations.  Cambridge University
    Press, 1992.


Chapter 19.   Further reading                                              180


    A complete description of an optimizing compiler for Standard ML, based
    on an intermediate representation called continuation-passing style.
    Shows how many advanced program optimizations can be applied to ML. Not
    directly relevant to the Caml Light system, since Caml Light does not use
    continuation-passing style at all, and makes little attempts at
    optimizing programs.


19.4 Applications of ML

The following reports show ML at work in various, sometimes unexpected, areas.

 -  Emmanuel Chailloux and Guy Cousineau.  The MLgraph primer.  Technical
    report 92-15, Ecole Normale Superieure, 1992.  (Available by anonymous
    FTP on ftp.ens.fr.)

    Describes a Caml Light library that produces Postscript pictures through
    high-level drawing functions.

 -  Xavier Leroy.  Programmation du systeme Unix en Caml Light.  Technical
    report 147, INRIA, 1992.  (Available by anonymous FTP on ftp.inria.fr.)

    A Unix systems programming course, demonstrating the use of the Caml
    Light library that gives access to Unix system calls.

 -  John H. Reppy.  Concurrent programming with events --- The concurrent ML
    manual.  Cornell University, 1990.  (Available by anonymous FTP on
    research.att.com.)

    Concurrent ML extends Standard ML of New Jersey with concurrent processes
    that communicate through channels and events.

 -  Jeannette M. Wing, Manuel Faehndrich, J. Gregory Morrisett and Scottt
    Nettles.  Extensions to Standard ML to support transactions.  Technical
    report CMU-CS-92-132, Carnegie-Mellon University, 1992.  (Available by
    anonymous FTP on reports.adm.cs.cmu.edu.)

    How to integrate the basic database operations to Standard ML.

 -  Emden R. Gansner and John H. Reppy.  eXene.  Bell Labs, 1991.  (Available
    by anonymous FTP on research.att.com.)

    An interface between Standard ML of New Jersey and the X Windows
    windowing system.









Index to the library



! (infix), 112                           add_int, 102
!= (infix), 98                           add_num, 168
& (infix), 95                            alarm, 160
&& (infix), 95                           approx_num_exp, 170
* (infix), 99, 102                       approx_num_fix, 170
** (infix), 100                          arg (module), 118
**. (infix), 100                         arith_status, 171
**/ (infix), 169                         arith_status (module), 171
*. (infix), 99                           asin, 100
*/ (infix), 169                          asr (infix), 103
+ (infix), 99, 102                       assoc, 111
+. (infix), 99                           assq, 111
+/ (infix), 168                          atan, 100
- (infix), 99, 102                       atan2, 100
-. (infix), 99                           background, 144
-/ (infix), 169                          Bad (exception), 119
/ (infix), 99, 102                       baltree (module), 119
/. (infix), 99                           basename, 121
// (infix), 169                          big_int_of_num, 171
< (infix), 97                            bind, 163
<. (infix), 100                          black, 144
</ (infix), 170                          blit_image, 147
<= (infix), 97                           blit_string, 114
<=. (infix), 100                         blit_vect, 116
<=/ (infix), 170                         blue, 144
<> (infix), 97                           bool (module), 95
<>. (infix), 100                         bounded_split, 174
<>/ (infix), 170                         Break (exception), 141
= (infix), 97                            builtin (module), 96
=. (infix), 100                          button_down, 148
=/ (infix), 170
== (infix), 98                           catch_break, 141
> (infix), 97                            cd, 51
>. (infix), 100                          ceil, 100
>/ (infix), 170                          ceiling_num, 169
>= (infix), 97                           char (module), 97
>=. (infix), 100                         char_for_read, 97
>=/ (infix), 170                         char_of_int, 97
@ (infix), 109                           chdir, 141, 156
^ (infix), 114                           check_suffix, 121
|| (infix), 95                           chmod, 155
abs, 102                                 choose, 138
abs_float, 100                           chop_suffix, 121
abs_num, 170                             chown, 155
accept, 163                              clear, 130, 136, 139
access, 156                              clear_graph, 143
acos, 100                                clear_parser, 134
add, 119, 131, 133, 136, 137             close, 141, 153
add_float, 99                            close_box, 122


                                     181


Index to the library                                                       182


close_graph, 143                         dup2, 157
close_in, 109                            elements, 138
close_out, 107                           empty, 133, 137
close_process, 157                       Empty (exception), 136, 139
close_process_in, 157                    End_of_file (exception), 104
close_process_out, 157                   end_of_stream, 113
close_tbox, 125                          environment, 151
closedir, 157                            eprint, 136
combine, 111                             eprintf, 127, 135
command_line, 140                        eq (module), 97
compare, 97, 120, 138                    eq_float, 100
compare_num, 170                         eq_int, 102
compare_strings, 115                     eq_num, 170
compile, 49                              eq_string, 115
concat, 114, 120, 174                    equal, 138
concat_vect, 116                         err_formatter, 126
connect, 163                             error_message, 151
contains, 119                            establish_server, 164
copy_vect, 116                           exc (module), 98
cos, 100                                 except, 110
cosh, 100                                exceptq, 110
create_image, 147                        execv, 151
create_lexer, 132                        execve, 151
create_lexer_channel, 132                execvp, 152
create_lexer_string, 132                 exists, 110
create_string, 114                       exit, 104, 140
current_dir_name, 120                    Exit (exception), 98
current_point, 145                       exp, 100
cyan, 144

debug_mode, 50                           Failure (exception), 98
decr, 112                                failwith, 99
decr_num, 170                            fchar (module), 99
denominator_num, 168                     fchmod, 155
descr_of_in_channel, 153                 fchown, 155
descr_of_out_channel, 154                fcntl_int, 156
diff, 138                                fcntl_ptr, 156
directory, 51                            filename (module), 120
dirname, 121                             fill_arc, 146
div_float, 99                            fill_circle, 146
div_int, 102                             fill_ellipse, 146
div_num, 169                             fill_poly, 146
Division_by_zero (exception), 102        fill_rect, 146
do_list, 109                             fill_string, 114
do_list2, 110                            fill_vect, 116
do_list_combine, 112                     find, 120, 131, 133
do_stream, 113                           find_all, 131
do_table, 131                            first_chars, 175
do_table_rev, 131                        flat_map, 110
do_vect, 117                             float, 137
draw_arc, 145                            float (module), 99
draw_char, 145                           float_of_int, 99
draw_circle, 145                         float_of_num, 171
draw_ellipse, 145                        float_of_string, 101
draw_image, 146                          floor, 100
draw_string, 145                         floor_num, 169
dump_image, 146                          flush, 106
dup, 157                                 fold, 138


Index to the library                                                       183


for_all, 110                             getpwuid, 162
force_newline, 123                       getservbyname, 165
foreground, 144                          getservbyport, 165
fork, 152                                getsockname, 163
format, 175                              gettimeofday, 160
format (module), 121                     getuid, 160
fprint, 135                              global_replace, 174
fprintf, 127, 135                        global_substitute, 174
frexp, 101                               gmtime, 160
fst, 111                                 Graphic_failure (exception), 143
fstat, 155                               graphics (module), 143
fstring (module), 101                    green, 144
ftruncate, 154                           group_beginning, 173
full_init, 137                           group_end, 173
full_major, 129                          gt_float, 100
fvect (module), 101                      gt_int, 102
gc (module), 128                         gt_num, 170
ge_float, 100                            gt_string, 115
ge_int, 102                              handle_unix_error, 151
ge_num, 170                              hash, 131
ge_string, 115                           hash_param, 131
genlex (module), 129                     hashtbl (module), 130
get, 129                                 hd, 109
get_approx_printing, 171                 in_channel_length, 109
get_ellipsis_text, 125                   in_channel_of_descr, 153
get_error_when_null_denominator, 171     include, 49
get_floating_precision, 171              incr, 112
get_formatter_output_functions, 126      incr_num, 170
get_image, 147                           index, 111
get_lexeme, 132                          index_char, 115
get_lexeme_char, 133                     index_char_from, 115
get_lexeme_end, 133                      inet_addr_of_string, 162
get_lexeme_start, 133                    init, 137
get_margin, 123                          init_vect, 116
get_max_boxes, 124                       input, 108
get_max_indent, 124                      input_binary_int, 108
get_normalize_ratio, 171                 input_byte, 108
get_normalize_ratio_when_printing,       input_char, 108
      171                                input_line, 108
getcwd, 156                              input_value, 108
getegid, 161                             install_printer, 50
getenv, 141                              int, 137
geteuid, 161                             int (module), 101
getgid, 161                              int_of_char, 97
getgrgid, 162                            int_of_float, 99
getgrnam, 161                            int_of_num, 171
getgroups, 161                           int_of_string, 103
gethostbyaddr, 165                       integer_num, 169
gethostbyname, 165                       inter, 138
gethostname, 164                         interactive, 140
getlogin, 161                            intersect, 111
getpeername, 163                         invalid_arg, 99
getpid, 152                              Invalid_argument (exception), 98
getppid, 152                             io (module), 104
getprotobyname, 165                      ioctl_int, 158
getprotobynumber, 165                    ioctl_ptr, 158
getpwnam, 161


Index to the library                                                       184


is_absolute, 121                         map2, 110
is_empty, 137                            map_combine, 112
is_integer_num, 169                      map_vect, 117
it_list, 109                             map_vect_list, 117
it_list2, 110                            match_beginning, 173
iter, 134, 136, 138, 139                 match_end, 173
join, 174                                Match_failure (exception), 21--23,
                                                96
key_pressed, 148                         matched_group, 173
kill, 159                                matched_string, 173
                                         max, 98
land (infix), 103                        max_int, 103
last_chars, 175                          max_num, 170
ldexp, 101                               mem, 110, 137
le_float, 100                            mem_assoc, 111
le_int, 102                              memq, 110
le_num, 170                              merge, 138
le_string, 115                           min, 98
length, 136, 139                         min_int, 103
lexing (module), 132                     min_num, 170
lineto, 145                              minor, 129
link, 155                                minus, 99, 102
list (module), 109                       minus_float, 99
list_it, 110                             minus_int, 102
list_it2, 110                            minus_num, 169
list_length, 109                         mkdir, 156
list_of_vect, 117                        mkfifo, 157
listen, 163                              mod (infix), 102
lnot, 103                                mod_float, 101
load, 49                                 mod_num, 169
load_object, 49                          modf, 101
localtime, 160                           modify, 120
lockf, 158                               mouse_pos, 147
log, 100                                 moveto, 145
log10, 100                               mult_float, 99
lor (infix), 103                         mult_int, 102
lseek, 154                               mult_num, 169
lshift_left, 103                         nat_of_num, 171
lshift_right, 103                        neq_float, 100
lsl (infix), 103                         neq_int, 102
lsr (infix), 103                         neq_string, 115
lstat, 155                               new, 130, 136, 139
lt_float, 100                            nice, 152
lt_int, 102                              normalize_num, 168
lt_num, 170                              not (infix), 96
lt_string, 115                           Not_found (exception), 98
lxor (infix), 103                        nth_char, 113
magenta, 144                             num (module), 168
major, 129                               num_of_big_int, 171
make_formatter, 126                      num_of_float, 171
make_image, 146                          num_of_int, 171
make_lexer, 130                          num_of_nat, 171
make_matrix, 116                         num_of_ratio, 171
make_string, 114                         num_of_string, 170
make_vect, 116                           numerator_num, 168
map, 109                                 open, 140, 153
map (module), 133


Index to the library                                                       185


open_box, 122                            pp_open_hbox, 127
open_connection, 164                     pp_open_hovbox, 127
open_descriptor_in, 107                  pp_open_hvbox, 127
open_descriptor_out, 106                 pp_open_tbox, 127
open_graph, 143                          pp_open_vbox, 127
open_hbox, 124                           pp_over_max_boxes, 127
open_hovbox, 124                         pp_print_as, 127
open_hvbox, 124                          pp_print_bool, 127
open_in, 107                             pp_print_break, 127
open_in_bin, 107                         pp_print_char, 127
open_in_gen, 107                         pp_print_cut, 127
open_out, 105                            pp_print_float, 127
open_out_bin, 106                        pp_print_flush, 127
open_out_gen, 106                        pp_print_if_newline, 127
open_process, 157                        pp_print_int, 127
open_process_in, 157                     pp_print_newline, 127
open_process_out, 157                    pp_print_space, 127
open_tbox, 125                           pp_print_string, 127
open_vbox, 124                           pp_print_tab, 127
opendir, 156                             pp_print_tbreak, 127
or (infix), 95                           pp_set_ellipsis_text, 127
out_channel_length, 107                  pp_set_formatter_out_channel, 127
out_channel_of_descr, 153                pp_set_formatter_output_functions,
Out_of_memory (exception), 98                   127
output, 106                              pp_set_margin, 127
output_binary_int, 106                   pp_set_max_boxes, 127
output_byte, 106                         pp_set_max_indent, 127
output_char, 106                         pp_set_tab, 127
output_compact_value, 107                pred, 102
output_string, 106                       pred_num, 170
output_value, 106                        prerr_char, 105
over_max_boxes, 124                      prerr_endline, 105
pair (module), 111                       prerr_float, 105
parse, 119                               prerr_int, 105
Parse_error (exception), 113, 134        prerr_string, 105
Parse_failure (exception), 112           print, 136
parsing (module), 134                    print_as, 122
pause, 159                               print_bool, 122
peek, 136                                print_break, 123
pipe, 157                                print_char, 104, 122
plot, 144                                print_cut, 123
point_color, 144                         print_endline, 104
pop, 139                                 print_float, 104, 122
pos_in, 109                              print_flush, 123
pos_out, 107                             print_if_newline, 123
power, 100                               print_int, 104, 122
power_num, 169                           print_newline, 104, 123
pp_close_box, 127                        print_num, 171
pp_close_tbox, 127                       print_space, 122
pp_force_newline, 127                    print_stat, 129
pp_get_ellipsis_text, 127                print_string, 104, 122
pp_get_formatter_output_functions,       print_tab, 125
      127                                print_tbreak, 125
pp_get_margin, 127                       printexc (module), 134
pp_get_max_boxes, 127                    printf, 127, 135
pp_get_max_indent, 127                   printf (module), 134
pp_open_box, 127                         push, 139


Index to the library                                                       186


queue (module), 136                      set, 129
quit, 49                                 set (module), 137
quo (infix), 102                         set_approx_printing, 171
quo_num, 169                             set_color, 144
raise, 98                                set_ellipsis_text, 125
random (module), 137                     set_error_when_null_denominator, 171
ratio_of_num, 171                        set_floating_precision, 171
read, 153                                set_font, 145
read_float, 105                          set_formatter_out_channel, 125
read_int, 105                            set_formatter_output_functions, 125
read_key, 148                            set_line_width, 145
read_line, 105                           set_margin, 123
readdir, 156                             set_max_boxes, 124
readlink, 157                            set_max_indent, 123
really_input, 108                        set_normalize_ratio, 171
recv, 163                                set_normalize_ratio_when_printing,
recvfrom, 163                                   171
red, 144                                 set_nth_char, 114
ref (module), 112                        set_print_depth, 50
regexp, 172                              set_print_length, 50
regexp_case_fold, 173                    set_tab, 125
remove, 120, 131, 133, 138, 141          set_text_size, 145
remove_printer, 50                       setgid, 161
rename, 141, 155                         setuid, 161
replace_first, 174                       shutdown, 163
replace_string, 115                      shutdown_connection, 164
rev, 109                                 sign_num, 169
rewinddir, 156                           signal, 159
rgb, 144                                 sin, 100
rhs_end, 134                             sinh, 100
rhs_start, 134                           size_x, 144
rindex_char, 115                         size_y, 144
rindex_char_from, 115                    sleep, 160
rmdir, 156                               snd, 111
round_num, 169                           socket, 163
                                         socketpair, 163
s_irall, 140                             sort, 138
s_irgrp, 140                             sort (module), 138
s_iroth, 140                             sound, 148
s_irusr, 140                             split, 111, 120, 174
s_isgid, 140                             sprintf, 135
s_isuid, 140                             sqrt, 100
s_iwall, 140                             square_num, 169
s_iwgrp, 140                             stack (module), 139
s_iwoth, 140                             stat, 129, 154
s_iwusr, 140                             std_err, 104
s_ixall, 140                             std_formatter, 126
s_ixgrp, 140                             std_in, 104
s_ixoth, 140                             std_out, 104
s_ixusr, 140                             stderr, 104, 153
search_backward, 173                     stdin, 104, 153
search_forward, 173                      stdout, 104, 153
seek_in, 108                             str (module), 172
seek_out, 107                            stream (module), 112
select, 158                              stream_check, 113
send, 164                                stream_from, 113
sendto, 164                              stream_get, 113
                                         stream_next, 113


Index to the library                                                       187


stream_of_channel, 113                   vect_assign, 116
stream_of_string, 113                    vect_item, 115
string (module), 113                     vect_length, 115
string_after, 175                        vect_of_list, 117
string_before, 175                       verbose_mode, 50
string_for_read, 115                     wait, 152
string_length, 113                       wait_next_event, 147
string_match, 173                        waitopt, 152
string_of_bool, 96                       waitpid, 152
string_of_char, 97                       white, 144
string_of_float, 101                     write, 153
string_of_inet_addr, 162
string_of_int, 103                       yellow, 144
string_of_num, 170
sub_float, 99
sub_int, 102
sub_num, 169
sub_string, 114
sub_vect, 116
substitute_first, 174
subtract, 111
succ, 102
succ_num, 170
symbol_end, 134
symbol_start, 134
symlink, 157
sys (module), 139
Sys_error (exception), 139
sys_print_num, 171
system, 152
system_command, 141

take, 136
tan, 100
tanh, 100
tcdrain, 166
tcflow, 167
tcflush, 167
tcgetattr, 166
tcsendbreak, 166
tcsetattr, 166
text_size, 145
time, 141, 160
times, 160
tl, 109
toplevel (module), 49
trace, 50
transp, 146
truncate, 154

umask, 155
union, 111, 138
unix (module), 149
Unix_error (exception), 151
unlink, 155
untrace, 50
utimes, 160

vect (module), 115









Index of keywords



and, see let, type, exception,
      value, where

begin, 19, 20

do, see while, for
done, see while, for
downto, see for

else, see if
end, 19, 20
exception, 28, 29

for, 19, 23
fun, 19
function, 19, 30

if, 19, 22
in, see let

let, 19, 21

match, 19, 23, 30
mutable, 27, 32

not, 19

of, see type, exception
or, 19, 23

prefix, 19, 25, 34

rec, see let, where

then, see if
to, see for
try, 19, 24
type, 27, 29

value, 29

when, 31
where, 32
while, 23
with, see match, try









                                     188